Avatar PM 'Benefit Enrollment and Maintenance (834)'
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Benefit Enrollment and Maintenance (834)
- Benefit Enrollment and Maintenance (834) Compile/Post Report
Scenario 1: 'Benefit Enrollment and Maintenance (834)' - Verification of Effective Date/Expiration Date Information
Specific Setup:
- Avatar PM Registry Setting 'Enable 834 Transaction Set' must be enabled
- 'Default Benefit Effective Date (2300-DTP-03)' and/or 'Default Expiration Date (2300-DTP-03)' values may optionally be defined (via Avatar PM 'Guarantors/Payors' form '270 / 271 / 834' section)
- 834 Benefit Enrollment Maintenance eligibility file for loading/compilation/posting in Avatar PM system, including one or more valid health coverage details
- Crystal Reports or other SQL reporting tool
Steps
- Open Avatar PM 'Benefit Enrollment and Maintenance (834)' form.
- Select 'Load File' in 'Options' field, and enter 'File Path/Name' value for 834 file to be loaded - selecting inbound 834 file including one or valid more health coverage details.
- Select 'Compile File' in 'Options' field, and select loaded 834 file for compilation.
- Click 'Process File' button to compile inbound 834 file data.
- Select 'Run Report' in 'Options' field, and select compiled 834 file for report.
- Click 'Process File' button to open 834 inbound compile report.
- In 834 inbound compile report - ensure that in case where 2300-DTP Effective Date is included without 2300-DTP Expiration Date in health coverage detail and previously posted 834 coverage information for same Unique ID/Policy Number and Coverage Expiration Date exist in Avatar PM (existing information in SQL table 'SYSTEM.eligibility_dependent_cov'), inbound 834 health care coverage entry is successfully compiled.
- Note - 'Coverage Expiration Date' values may also be determined by Avatar PM Guarantor/Payor in cases where not directly present in 834 file health coverage information (via 'Default Expiration Date (2300-DTP-03)' field in Avatar PM 'Guarantors/Payors' form, '270 / 271 / 834' section); In case where 'Default Expiration Date (2300-DTP-03)' is defined and 2300-DTP Expiration Date is not included in 834 file health coverage information, ensure that inbound 834 health care coverage entry is successfully compiled with default 'Coverage Expiration Date' value.
- In 834 inbound compile report - ensure that in case where 2300-DTP Expiration Date is included without 2300-DTP Effective Date in health coverage detail and previously posted 834 coverage information for same Unique ID/Policy Number and Coverage Expiration Date exist in Avatar PM (existing information in SQL table 'SYSTEM.eligibility_dependent_cov'), inbound 834 health care coverage entry is successfully compiled.
- Note - 'Coverage Effective Date' values may also be determined by Avatar PM Guarantor/Payor in cases where not directly present in 834 file health coverage information (via 'Default Benefit Effective Date (2300-DTP-03)' field in Avatar PM 'Guarantors/Payors' form, '270 / 271 / 834' section); In case where 'Default Benefit Effective Date (2300-DTP-03)' is defined and 2300-DTP Effective Date is not included in 834 file health coverage information, ensure that inbound 834 health care coverage entry is successfully compiled with default 'Coverage Effective Date' value.
- In 834 inbound compile report - ensure that in case where 2300-DTP Effective Date and 2300-DTP Expiration Date are included for same Unique ID/Policy Number under separate/different 2000 loop sets, inbound 834 health care coverage entry is successfully compiled (using 2300-DTP Effective Date and 2300-DTP Expiration Date values from file where present).
- Select 'Post File' in 'Options' field, and select compiled 834 file for posting.
- Click 'Process File' button to post inbound 834 file data.
- Open Crystal Reports or other SQL reporting tool.
- In Avatar PM SQL table 'SYSTEM.eligibility_dependent_cov', ensure that 'eligibility_eff_date' and 'eligibility_exp_date' values from 834 file health coverage information (or defaulted by Avatar PM system per Guarantor configurations) are present for eligibility data row(s) created via 834 inbound file posting; For client/834 coverage information where previous coverage information existed in SQL table 'SYSTEM.eligibility_dependent_cov' prior to latest 834 file posting, ensure that 'eligibility_eff_date' and 'eligibility_exp_date' values are updated according to new/latest 834 file health coverage information where applicable.
|
Topics
• Benefit Enrollment and Maintenance (834)
|
Diagnosis - Chart View
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Practitioner Enrollment
- Progress Notes (Group and Individual)
- Ambulatory Progress Notes
Scenario 1: Diagnosis - Validate display of Practitioner Credentials in the Chart View
Specific Setup:
- A client is enrolled in an existing episode (Client A).
- A practitioner is defined in 'Practitioner Enrollment' with the following (Practitioner A):
- 'Category/Taxonomy' Row 1:
- 'Effective Date' of "01/01/2022".
- 'End Date' of "10/01/2023".
- Practitioner Credential of "Administrator".
- 'Category/Taxonomy' Row 2:
- 'Effective Date' of "10/02/2023"
- No 'End Date' on file.
- Practitioner Credential of "Medical Doctor".
- The 'Diagnosis' form must be accessible from the Chart View.
Steps
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Diagnosis' form.
- Select "Update" in the 'Type Of Diagnosis' field.
- Enter "05/01/2023" in the 'Date Of Diagnosis' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'Time Of Diagnosis Field'.
- Click [New Row].
- Search for and select the desired value in the 'Diagnosis Search' field.
- Select "Active" in the 'Status' field.
- Select "Practitioner A" in the 'Diagnosing Practitioner' field.
- Populate all other required and desired fields.
- Submit the form.
- Double-click on "Client A" to access the Chart View.
- Select the 'Diagnosis' form from the left-hand side.
- Select the episode used in the previous steps.
- Validate that the previously diagnosis is displayed.
- Validate "Practitioner A" is displayed with the proper practitioner credentials based on the diagnosis date, which is "Administrator".
- Close the chart.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Diagnosis' form.
- Click [Add].
- Select "Update" in the 'Type Of Diagnosis' field.
- Enter "11/01/2023" in the 'Date Of Diagnosis' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'Time Of Diagnosis Field'.
- Click [New Row].
- Search for and select the desired value in the 'Diagnosis Search' field.
- Select "Active" in the 'Status' field.
- Select "Practitioner A" in the 'Diagnosing Practitioner' field.
- Populate all other required and desired fields.
- Submit the form.
- Double-click on "Client A" to access the Chart View.
- Select the 'Diagnosis' form from the left-hand side.
- Select the episode used in the previous steps.
- Validate that the previously filed diagnosis is displayed.
- Validate "Practitioner A" is displayed with the proper practitioner credentials based on the diagnosis date, which is "Medical Doctor".
- Close the chart.
|
Topics
• Diagnosis
• Chart View
|
Payor based Authorization
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Payor Based Authorizations
Scenario 1: Payor Based Authorizations - Add/Edit/Delete payor based authorization
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Payor Based Authorizations >> Enable Payor Based Authorizations = Y.
- Payor Based Authorizations >> Enable CPT Based Payor Authorizations Registry Setting Value = N.
- Authorization Group >> Require Authorizations at Guarantors/Payors Level Registry Setting Value = Y.
- Authorization Group Definition:
- New Authorization group(s) created. Note the authorization group number/names.
Steps
- Open 'Payor Based Authorizations’ form.
- Select 'Add' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete' field.
- Select desired guarantor from the 'Guarantor' field.
- Select desired program(s) from the 'Program' field.
- Enter desired date in the 'Effective Date' field. Note the date.
- Leave the 'Expiration Date' field empty.
- Select desired group number from the 'Authorization Group' field.
- Validate 'Service Codes' selected based on the selected 'Authorization Group'.
- Enter desired authorization number in the 'Authorization Number' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Open the 'Crystal Report' or any other SQL data viewer.
- Locate the PM namespace of the system.
- Query - select * from SYSTEM.table_payor_auths where GUARANTOR_ID=[desired guarantor id].
- Verify the 'effective_date' displays the correct date that is entered during creating a payor based authorization record.
- Verify the 'expiration_date' displays "NONE" because the field was blank during creating a payor based authorization record.
- Verify the 'authorization_number' field displays the correct authorization number.
- Open the 'Payor Based Authorizations’ form.
- Select 'Edit' from the 'Add/Edit/Delete' field.
- Click [Select Authorization To Edit/Delete].
- Select desired authorization record from the 'Edit Entry' list box.
- Click [OK].
- Update the 'Effective Date' field to different date. Note the date.
- Enter desired date in the 'Expiration Date' field. Note the date.
- Click [Submit].
- Open the 'Crystal Report' or any other SQL data viewer.
- Locate the PM namespace of the system.
- Query - select * from SYSTEM.table_payor_auths where GUARANTOR_ID=[desired guarantor id].
- Verify the 'effective_date' displays correct date that is changed during updating a payor based authorization record.
- Verify the 'expiration_date' displays correct date that is changed during updating a payor based authorization record.
- Verify the 'authorization_number' field displays the correct authorization number.
- Open the 'Payor Based Authorizations’ form.
- Select 'Edit' from the 'Add/Edit/Delete' field.
- Click [Select Authorization To Edit/Delete].
- Select desired authorization record from the 'Edit Entry' list box.
- Click [OK].
- Update the 'Effective Date' field to different date. Note the date.
- Enter same date in the 'Expiration Date' field. Note the date.
- Click [Submit].
- Open the 'Crystal Report' or any other SQL data viewer.
- Locate to the PM namespace of the system.
- Query - 'select * from SYSTEM.table_payor_auths where GUARANTOR_ID=[desired guarantor id]'.
- Verify the 'effective_date' displays correct date that is changed during updating a payor based authorization record.
- Verify the 'expiration_date' displays correct date that is changed during updating a payor based authorization record.
- Verify the 'authorization_number' field displays the correct authorization number.
- Open the 'Payor Based Authorizations’ form.
- Select 'Delete' from the 'Add/Edit/Delete' field.
- Click [Select Authorization To Edit/Delete].
- Select desired authorization record from the 'Edit Entry' list box.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Submit].
- Open the 'Crystal Report' or any other SQL data viewer.
- Locate to the PM namespace of the system.
- Query - 'select * from SYSTEM.table_payor_auths where GUARANTOR_ID=[desired guarantor id]'.
- Verify the 'effective_date' displays correct date that is changed during updating a payor based authorization record.
- Verify the 'expiration_date' displays correct date that is changed during updating a payor based authorization record.
- Verify the 'authorization_number' field displays the correct authorization number.
- Close the report.
|
Topics
• Payor Based Authorizations
• Database Tables
|
NCPDP
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Electronic Re-Billing Service Assignment
- Launch RxConnect
- RxConnect
Scenario 1: NCPDP - miscellaneous issues include claim rejection information and Medicare Part D re-billing related issues
Specific Setup:
- The Avatar application must be associated with an RxConnect Instance and configured to communicate via HL7.
- There must be active connections between Avatar and RxConnect for "ADT", "ORDERS", "FILL DETAILS", and "BILLING".
- The "ADT" and "ORDERS" connections must have both values selected in the 'Sub System Code Facility ID(s) Supported' field and the 'Include Sub System Code Facility ID in Outbound Message' field in the 'HL7 Connection Manager' form, which is a Netsmart Staff Only form. Please contact your Netsmart Representative.
- CE2000 must be installed and configured on the Database server.
- The 'Avatar PM->Billing->Electronic Billing->NCPDP->->Enable NCPDP Billing' registry setting must be set to "Y".
- The 'Avatar PM->Billing->Electronic Billing->Electronic Re-Billing Service Assignment->->Multiple Claim Original Reference Number/Claim Submission Reason Code' registry setting must be set to "Y".
- The 'RADplus->Database Management->RxConnect->->->Enable RxConnect Facility ID' registry setting must be set to "Y".
- Two inpatient programs must exist. (Program A) (Program B)
- Two sub system codes must exist:
- One associated with "Program A" with a 'Facility ID' of "41". (Sub System Code A)
- One associated with "Program B" with a 'Facility ID' of "42". (Sub System Code B)
- RxConnect must have at least two hospitals.
- One with a 'HL7 ID' of "41" associated to "Sub System Code A". (Hospital A)
- One with a 'HL7 ID' of "42" associated to "Sub System Code B". (Hospital B)
- Please log out of the application and log back in after completing the above configuration.
- Two clients must exist
- One client must have an active episode associated with "Program A". (Client A)
- One client must have an active episode associated with "Program B". (Client B)
- “Client A” and "Client B" must have a ‘Date of Birth’, ‘Sex’ and address on file in the ‘Update Client Data’ form, as well as information filed in the ‘Allergies and Hypersensitivities’ form, ‘Diagnosis’ form, and in the ‘Height’ and ‘Weight’ fields in the ‘Vitals Entry’ form.
- "Client A" and "Client B" must be associated with an NCPDP guarantor in the 'Financial Eligibility' form.
- "Client A" and "Client B" must have active pharmacy-type orders each with a duration of "60 Days" that starts in the past that have been processed in RxConnect. (Order A) (Order B)
- "Order A" and "Order B" must have two active NDC#'s each. (NDC A) (NDC B) for "Order A" and (NDC C) (NDC D) for "Order B".
- "Order A" must be administered for the first seven days using "NDC A", the second seven days using "NDC B", the third set of seven days using "NDC A", and the last set of seven days using "NDC B".
- "Order B" must be administered for the first seven days using "NDC C", the second seven days using "NDC D", the third set of seven days using "NDC C", and the last set of seven days using "NDC D".
- Charges must be batched in RxConnect.
- Charges must be compiled in the 'Compile Inbound HL7 Charge Batch File' form.
- Charges must be posted in the 'Post Inbound HL7 Charge Batch File' form.
- Charges must be rolled up and posted in the 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist' form and ensure that "Client A" and "Client B" contain two fills each for fourteen days.
- Charges must be closed for "Client A" and "Client B".
- An NCPDP bill must be created, claimed and a file must exist on the server, this is done in the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- The bill must be processed through CE2000 and be rejected.
- The user must be logged into the Root System Code.
Steps
|
Topics
• NX
• NCPDP
|
SQL Validation
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Advanced Billing Rule Definition
- Client Charge Input
- Advanced Billing Failed Compliance Report
Scenario 1: Advanced Billing Rule - Advanced Billing Failed Compliance Report-Validate SYSTEM.billing_tx_filing_compliance
Specific Setup:
- An Advanced Billing Rule Definition exists for service code 1.
- Note the conditions that will allow the service code 1 to fail compliance.
- Note the 'Reason For Failed Compliance'.
- Create a service for a client that will cause service code 1 to fail compliance. Note the service date.
Steps
- Open 'Advance Billing Failed Compliance Report'.
- Enter the 'Client'.
- Enter the service date in 'Service From Date' and Service Through Date'.
- Click [Launch Failed Compliance Report].
- Validate the 'Client'.
- Validate the 'Service Code'.
- Validate the 'Rule Description'.
- Validate the 'Reason for Failed Compliance'.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Use Crystal Reports or other SQL reporting tool to create a query of the 'SYSTEM.billing_tx_filing_compliance' table.
- Validate the query results match with details filled in 'Advance Billing Failed Compliance Report' form.
- Close the query results.
|
Topics
• Advanced Billing Rule Definition
|
AR Console Export
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- System Task Scheduler
- AR Console export Form
Scenario 1: AR Console Export
Specific Setup:
- Note the tester's 'User Definition'.
- Registry Settings:
- Set the 'Avatar PM->Billing->Accounts Receivable Management->->->Enable Accounts Receivable Management Functionality' registry setting to "Yes".
- Accounts Receivable functionality has been defined.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- An existing guarantor is identified to be used. Note the guarantor code/name.
- Service codes:
- An existing service code is identified to be used. Note the service code/description.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the service code identified in the ' Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing client is identified or a new client is admitted. Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor.
- Recurring Client Charge Input:
- 3-5 services are rendered to the client. Note service date, service code.
- Close charges.
- Charges created are closed.
- Client Ledger:
- The service distributed correctly to the assigned guarantor.
- Electronic Billing:
- All the services are claimed. Note the claim numbers.
- Use ‘AR Console User Defaults’ to give the tester access to the following:
- First initial of the client's last name.
- Admission program
- Guarantor the claim liability distributed to.
- Use ‘System Task Scheduler’ to process the ‘Auto AR Batch’ after the claims were created.
- AR Console:
- A claim follow up note is created for the first service of the client. Note the information of the claim follow-up note.
Steps
- Open ''Claim Follow-up'' form.
- Enter the client identified in setup in 'Select Client' input box.
- Click [Add] in 'Add, Edit Or Delete Claim' Follow-Up.
- Select the Guarantor defined in the setup from 'Guarantor' dropdown list.
- Select the desired claim in 'Claim' dropdown list.
- Validate that services display in 'Service(s)' text area.
- Click [Add] in 'Add, Edit Or Delete Row'.
- Enter any value in 'Follow-Up Date '.
- Click [No] in 'Followed Up'.
- Enter any value in 'Comments'.
- Repeat steps 7-11.
- Click [Update Row].
- Validate the values of 'Follow-Up Date / Status / Followed Up / Next Follow-Up Date / Completion Date / (Denial CRN# / Current CRN#)'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open "AR Console Export" form.
- Click [Selected Values] in 'AR Console Data to Export'.
- Select desired value in 'Financial Class Selection'.
- Select desired guarantor in 'Guarantors'.
- Select desired programs in 'Programs'.
- Click 'Export To CSV'.
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Verify excel file is downloaded.
- Validate that the correct data displays in one row.
|
Topics
• Accounts Receivable Management
• NX
|
|
Topics
• Service Codes
• File Import
• Client Charge Input
• Edit Service Information
|
Search Results - Diagnosis Filtering
Scenario 1: Diagnosis - Editing a diagnosis
Specific Setup:
- Admission:
- An existing client is identified or a new client is admitted. Note the client id/Name.
- Diagnosis:
- A client must have a diagnosis entered.
Steps
- Open the 'Diagnosis' form.
- Search for desired client in the 'Select Client' field.
- Validate results display.
- Select desired client from the results.
- Validate a Pre-Display is displayed showing existing diagnoses for the client.
- Select an existing diagnosis record.
- Click [Edit].
- Enter an invalid time in the 'Time of Diagnosis' field.
- Validate an Error message stating: "Invalid time format. HH:MM AM, HH:MM PM or HHMM military time (Midnight is 0000 hours.)"
- Validate the 'Time of Diagnosis' field defaults to the time that was saved prior.
- Change the 'Time of Diagnosis' field to the current time.
- Enter a different practitioner in the 'Diagnosing Practitioner' field.
- Select "Void" in the 'Status' field.
- Validate the voided diagnosis is crossed off.
- Navigate to the myDay view.
- Navigate back to the open 'Diagnosis' form.
- Validate the voided diagnosis is crossed off.
- Validate the 'Diagnosing Practitioner' contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate a Pre-Display Confirmation dialog is displayed stating: Do you want to return to Pre-Display?
- Click [Yes].
- Select desired diagnosis record.
- Click [Edit].
- Select "No" in the 'Show Active Only' field.
- Validate the voided diagnosis displays and is crossed off.
- Close the form.
- Open the "Registry Settings" form.
- Search for the registry setting "Default Limit Results by ICD Category".
- Set the value to any valid value. You can combine values by inserting an '&' such as "F&Z", which will return results whose ICD10 value begins with the letters "F" and "Z".
- Click [Submit] to file the form.
- Open the "Diagnosis" form.
- Edit a previously added row of the "Diagnosis" table.
- Search for any a number or letter and only the values with an ICD10 code that begins with the value specified in the registry setting will show up in the search results.
Scenario 2: Diagnosis - Diagnosis Entry
Specific Setup:
- A client must be enrolled in an active episode (Client A).
Steps
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Diagnosis' form.
- Click [Add].
- Select "Admission" in the 'Type of Diagnosis' field.
- Press the 'Tab' key on the 'Type of Diagnosis' field.
- Validate the focus shifts to the 'Date of Diagnosis' field and the admission date is displayed as expected.
- Press the 'Tab' key on the 'Date of Diagnosis' field.
- Validate the focus shifts to the 'Time of Diagnosis' field.
- Enter any value in the 'Time of Diagnosis' field.
- Click [New Row].
- Search for and select the desired value in the 'Diagnosis Search' field.
- Verify the 'Add To Problem List' field is defaulted to 'Yes'.
- Populate all required and desired fields.
- Click [Submit] and [No].
- Select "Client A" and access the ‘Diagnosis’ form.
- Select the previously created diagnosis row to edit.
- Click [Edit].
- Click [New Row].
- Search for and select the desired value in the 'Diagnosis Search' field.
- Validate that the 'Diagnosis Search' returns the expected diagnoses.
- Populate all required and desired fields.
- Click [Submit] and [No].
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Diagnosis' form.
- Select the diagnosis row edited in the previous steps.
- Click [Edit].
- Validate that the newly added diagnosis row is displayed.
- Close the form.
- Open the "Registry Settings" form.
- Search for the registry setting "Default Limit Results by ICD Category".
- Set the value to any valid value. You can combine values by inserting an '&' such as "F&Z", which will return results whose ICD10 value begins with the letters "F" and "Z".
- Click [Submit] to file the form.
- Select 'Client A' and open the "Diagnosis" form.
- Edit a previously added row of the "Diagnosis" table.
- Search for any number or letter and only the values with an ICD10 code that begins with the value specified in the registry setting will show up in the search results.
Scenario 3: Registry Setting - Default Limit Results by ICD Category"
Specific Setup:
- Note: When setting up the new Registry Setting, 'Default Limit Results by ICD Category', also check the following registry setting: 'Avatar PM->Client Information->Diagnosis->->->Remove References to ICD-9/DSM-IV Codesets'. If it's set to '2' do the following:
- Open the "Client Charge Input With Diagnosis Entry" form.
- Attempt to do a search on Diagnosis.
- Validate the search results are limited to the ICD codes that begin with the letters from the registry setting value.
- If 'No Records Found' is in the search results, then update 'Remove References to ICD-9/DSM-IV Codesets' as follows:
- Change the value from 2 to 0 and submit the change.
- Change the value from 0 back to 2 and submit the change.
- Repeat steps the above steps to verify that the results are displayed as expected.
Steps
- Open the "Registry Settings" form.
- Search for the registry setting "Default Limit Results by ICD Category".
- Note: This registry setting is only available in NX.
- Note the registry setting is defaulted to blank. This will generate all results.
- Open any of the following forms that include a diagnosis search such as "Client Chart Input with Diagnosis", "Diagnosis", "Edit Service Information", "Service Panel Chart Input", "Set Associated Codes", Ambulatory or Inpatient Progress Notes with Diagnosis, etc.
- Attempt to do a search on Diagnosis.
- Validate the search result returns all values and does not filter any results.
- Open the "Registry Settings" form.
- Search for the registry setting "Default Limit Results by ICD Category".
- Set the registry setting to a valid value other than blank.
- Open any of the forms mentioned in step 2.
- Attempt to do a search on Diagnosis.
- Validate the search results are limited to the ICD codes that begin with the letters from the registry setting value.
|
Topics
• Diagnosis
|
FoRSE Configuration
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- FoRSE Configuration
- FoRSE Mapping
Scenario 1: FoRSE Configuration
Specific Setup:
- Using the "User Definition" form, give the user access to the "FoRSE Configuration".
- Refresh the menus.
Steps
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Enable "FoRSE" functionality.
- Set the "Facility ID" to the value assigned by naatp.
- Set the "Secret Key" to the value assigned by naatp.
- Set the "Register New Company URL" to the URL provided by naatp.
- Set the "Registration Status URL" to the URL provided,
- Set the "Surveys URL" to the URL provided.
- Go to the "FoRSE Facility Configuration" section.
- Enter the information for the EHR Facilities added.
- Click "Submit" to file the data.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Validate the "Enable" radio button is clicked.
- Validate "Facility ID" is set to the value assigned by naatp.
- Validate the "Secret Key" is set to the value assigned by naatp.
- Validate the "Register New Company URL" is set to the URL provided by naatp.
- Validate the "Registration Status URL" is set to the URL provided,
- Validate "Surveys URL" is set to the URL provided.
- Go to the "FoRSE Facility Configuration" section.
- Validate the information for the EHR Facilities is correct.
- Click "View" in the "FoRSE Status" column of each row added .
- Validate the "FoRSE Status indicates "Success".
- Click "Discard" to close the form
Scenario 2: FoRSE Mapping
Specific Setup:
- FoRSE must be configured and enabled.
Steps
- Open the "FoRSE Mapping" form.
- Add a new mapping.
- Select the desired survey to map to in the "Type of Survey" drop down,
- Check the "EHR Facility IDs" to submit for this particular survey.
- For each Question in the survey, select an Avatar form and field to map to.
- Click "View" under the "Field Translation" column.
- Left as is, the system will use the default dictionary values and codes.
- If you wish to change the default dictionary values, you can use the "Field Translation".
- Click "Submit" to file the form.
- Open the "FoRSE Mapping" form.
- Edit an existing mapping.
- Select an existing mapping in the "Mapping" drop down
- Validate mapping is enabled.
- Validate the "EHR Facility IDs" are the ones selected previously.
- Validate the "Field Mapping" is as what was previously entered.
- File the "Admission" form either for a new client or an existing client.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Go to the "FoRSE Monitor" section.
- Set the start and end dates.
- Select the client.
- Click "Launch Report".
- Click "Click To View Record".
- Validate payload indicates success.
Scenario 3: FoRSE Surveys
Specific Setup:
- Validate FoRSE is configured and enabled.
- Validate the survey is mapped to an Avatar form.
Steps
- Open a form that is mapped to a survey.
- File the form.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Go to the "FoRSE Monitor" section.
- Set the start and end dates.
- Select the client.
- Click "Launch Report".
- Click "Click To View Record".
- Validate payload indicates a success.
FoRSE Configuration
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- FoRSE Configuration
- FoRSE Mapping
Scenario 1: FoRSE Configuration
Specific Setup:
- Using the "User Definition" form, give the user access to the "FoRSE Configuration".
- Refresh the menus.
Steps
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Enable "FoRSE" functionality.
- Set the "Facility ID" to the value assigned by naatp.
- Set the "Secret Key" to the value assigned by naatp.
- Set the "Register New Company URL" to the URL provided by naatp.
- Set the "Registration Status URL" to the URL provided,
- Set the "Surveys URL" to the URL provided.
- Go to the "FoRSE Facility Configuration" section.
- Enter the information for the EHR Facilities added.
- Click "Submit" to file the data.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Validate the "Enable" radio button is clicked.
- Validate "Facility ID" is set to the value assigned by naatp.
- Validate the "Secret Key" is set to the value assigned by naatp.
- Validate the "Register New Company URL" is set to the URL provided by naatp.
- Validate the "Registration Status URL" is set to the URL provided,
- Validate "Surveys URL" is set to the URL provided.
- Go to the "FoRSE Facility Configuration" section.
- Validate the information for the EHR Facilities is correct.
- Click "View" in the "FoRSE Status" column of each row added .
- Validate the "FoRSE Status indicates "Success".
- Click "Discard" to close the form
Scenario 2: FoRSE Mapping
Specific Setup:
- FoRSE must be configured and enabled.
Steps
- Open the "FoRSE Mapping" form.
- Add a new mapping.
- Select the desired survey to map to in the "Type of Survey" drop down,
- Check the "EHR Facility IDs" to submit for this particular survey.
- For each Question in the survey, select an Avatar form and field to map to.
- Click "View" under the "Field Translation" column.
- Left as is, the system will use the default dictionary values and codes.
- If you wish to change the default dictionary values, you can use the "Field Translation".
- Click "Submit" to file the form.
- Open the "FoRSE Mapping" form.
- Edit an existing mapping.
- Select an existing mapping in the "Mapping" drop down
- Validate mapping is enabled.
- Validate the "EHR Facility IDs" are the ones selected previously.
- Validate the "Field Mapping" is as what was previously entered.
- File the "Admission" form either for a new client or an existing client.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Go to the "FoRSE Monitor" section.
- Set the start and end dates.
- Select the client.
- Click "Launch Report".
- Click "Click To View Record".
- Validate payload indicates success.
Scenario 3: FoRSE Surveys
Specific Setup:
- Validate FoRSE is configured and enabled.
- Validate the survey is mapped to an Avatar form.
Steps
- Open a form that is mapped to a survey.
- File the form.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Go to the "FoRSE Monitor" section.
- Set the start and end dates.
- Select the client.
- Click "Launch Report".
- Click "Click To View Record".
- Validate payload indicates a success.
FoRSE Mapping
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- FoRSE Configuration
- FoRSE Mapping
Scenario 1: FoRSE Configuration
Specific Setup:
- Using the "User Definition" form, give the user access to the "FoRSE Configuration".
- Refresh the menus.
Steps
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Enable "FoRSE" functionality.
- Set the "Facility ID" to the value assigned by naatp.
- Set the "Secret Key" to the value assigned by naatp.
- Set the "Register New Company URL" to the URL provided by naatp.
- Set the "Registration Status URL" to the URL provided,
- Set the "Surveys URL" to the URL provided.
- Go to the "FoRSE Facility Configuration" section.
- Enter the information for the EHR Facilities added.
- Click "Submit" to file the data.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Validate the "Enable" radio button is clicked.
- Validate "Facility ID" is set to the value assigned by naatp.
- Validate the "Secret Key" is set to the value assigned by naatp.
- Validate the "Register New Company URL" is set to the URL provided by naatp.
- Validate the "Registration Status URL" is set to the URL provided,
- Validate "Surveys URL" is set to the URL provided.
- Go to the "FoRSE Facility Configuration" section.
- Validate the information for the EHR Facilities is correct.
- Click "View" in the "FoRSE Status" column of each row added .
- Validate the "FoRSE Status indicates "Success".
- Click "Discard" to close the form
Scenario 2: FoRSE Mapping
Specific Setup:
- FoRSE must be configured and enabled.
Steps
- Open the "FoRSE Mapping" form.
- Add a new mapping.
- Select the desired survey to map to in the "Type of Survey" drop down,
- Check the "EHR Facility IDs" to submit for this particular survey.
- For each Question in the survey, select an Avatar form and field to map to.
- Click "View" under the "Field Translation" column.
- Left as is, the system will use the default dictionary values and codes.
- If you wish to change the default dictionary values, you can use the "Field Translation".
- Click "Submit" to file the form.
- Open the "FoRSE Mapping" form.
- Edit an existing mapping.
- Select an existing mapping in the "Mapping" drop down
- Validate mapping is enabled.
- Validate the "EHR Facility IDs" are the ones selected previously.
- Validate the "Field Mapping" is as what was previously entered.
- File the "Admission" form either for a new client or an existing client.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Go to the "FoRSE Monitor" section.
- Set the start and end dates.
- Select the client.
- Click "Launch Report".
- Click "Click To View Record".
- Validate payload indicates success.
Scenario 3: FoRSE Surveys
Specific Setup:
- Validate FoRSE is configured and enabled.
- Validate the survey is mapped to an Avatar form.
Steps
- Open a form that is mapped to a survey.
- File the form.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Go to the "FoRSE Monitor" section.
- Set the start and end dates.
- Select the client.
- Click "Launch Report".
- Click "Click To View Record".
- Validate payload indicates a success.
FoRSE Functionality - Communication API
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- FoRSE Configuration
- FoRSE Mapping
Scenario 1: FoRSE Configuration
Specific Setup:
- Using the "User Definition" form, give the user access to the "FoRSE Configuration".
- Refresh the menus.
Steps
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Enable "FoRSE" functionality.
- Set the "Facility ID" to the value assigned by naatp.
- Set the "Secret Key" to the value assigned by naatp.
- Set the "Register New Company URL" to the URL provided by naatp.
- Set the "Registration Status URL" to the URL provided,
- Set the "Surveys URL" to the URL provided.
- Go to the "FoRSE Facility Configuration" section.
- Enter the information for the EHR Facilities added.
- Click "Submit" to file the data.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Validate the "Enable" radio button is clicked.
- Validate "Facility ID" is set to the value assigned by naatp.
- Validate the "Secret Key" is set to the value assigned by naatp.
- Validate the "Register New Company URL" is set to the URL provided by naatp.
- Validate the "Registration Status URL" is set to the URL provided,
- Validate "Surveys URL" is set to the URL provided.
- Go to the "FoRSE Facility Configuration" section.
- Validate the information for the EHR Facilities is correct.
- Click "View" in the "FoRSE Status" column of each row added .
- Validate the "FoRSE Status indicates "Success".
- Click "Discard" to close the form
Scenario 2: FoRSE Mapping
Specific Setup:
- FoRSE must be configured and enabled.
Steps
- Open the "FoRSE Mapping" form.
- Add a new mapping.
- Select the desired survey to map to in the "Type of Survey" drop down,
- Check the "EHR Facility IDs" to submit for this particular survey.
- For each Question in the survey, select an Avatar form and field to map to.
- Click "View" under the "Field Translation" column.
- Left as is, the system will use the default dictionary values and codes.
- If you wish to change the default dictionary values, you can use the "Field Translation".
- Click "Submit" to file the form.
- Open the "FoRSE Mapping" form.
- Edit an existing mapping.
- Select an existing mapping in the "Mapping" drop down
- Validate mapping is enabled.
- Validate the "EHR Facility IDs" are the ones selected previously.
- Validate the "Field Mapping" is as what was previously entered.
- File the "Admission" form either for a new client or an existing client.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Go to the "FoRSE Monitor" section.
- Set the start and end dates.
- Select the client.
- Click "Launch Report".
- Click "Click To View Record".
- Validate payload indicates success.
Scenario 3: FoRSE Surveys
Specific Setup:
- Validate FoRSE is configured and enabled.
- Validate the survey is mapped to an Avatar form.
Steps
- Open a form that is mapped to a survey.
- File the form.
- Open the "FoRSE Configuration" form.
- Go to the "FoRSE Monitor" section.
- Set the start and end dates.
- Select the client.
- Click "Launch Report".
- Click "Click To View Record".
- Validate payload indicates a success.
|
Topics
• FoRSE
|
Discontinue or Hold Orders Upon Leave
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Orders This Episode
- Leaves
- eMAR
Scenario 1: OE NX - Put Orders On Hold During Leave
Specific Setup:
- Avatar PM 2024 Update 36, Avatar OE 2024 Update 35, Avatar eMAR 2024 Update 16, Avatar CWS 2024 Update 48 and myAvatar NX Release 2024.07.00 is required in order to utilize full functionality.
- The "(772) Discontinue or Hold Orders Upon Leave" extended attribute must be set to "Hold" in the Client '(757) Types Of Leave From' dictionary for "Leave"
- Please log out of the application and log back in after completing the above configuration.
- A client must have an active inpatient episode (Client A)
- “Client A” must have a ‘Date of Birth’, ‘Sex’ and address on file in the ‘Update Client Data’ form, as well as information filed in the ‘Allergies and Hypersensitivities’ form, ‘Diagnosis’ form, and in the ‘Height’ and ‘Weight’ fields in the ‘Vitals Entry’ form.
Steps
- Select "Client A" and access the Order Entry Console.
- Search for and select any pharmacy-type order code.
- Populate the required fields and click [Add to Scratchpad].
- Search for and select any lab-type order code.
- Populate the required fields selecting a "PRN" frequency and click [Add to Scratchpad].
- Search for and select any dietary oral-type order code.
- Populate the required fields and click [Add to Scratchpad] and [Sign].
- Validate the 'Order grid' contains three orders.
- Access the 'Leaves' form.
- Populate the required fields selecting "Leave" from the 'Type of Leave From' field and click [Submit].
- Access the Order Entry Console.
- Validate the 'Order grid' contains the three orders with each having an action of "Active (On Hold automatically upon leave - Leave)".
- Access 'eMAR NX' for "Client A".
- Validate there is a banner across the pharmacy-type order hour columns displaying "Leave (Leave) Effective (leave date and leave time)".
- Click [Scan Client], populate the required fields, and click [Save].
- Perform 'Client Education' and 'Order Acknowledgement'.
- Click the ellipsis for the pharmacy-type order and select "Document Additional Dose".
- Validate the 'Select Administration Time' dialog is launched.
- Select any value in the 'Scheduled Undocumented Doses' section and click [Select].
- Validate the order is displayed in the 'Medication List' and click [Administer].
- Validate the 'Medication Administration' dialog is displayed.
- Populate the required fields.
- Click [Address Alerts] and validate there is an alert on the 'Administration Date/Time' tab that displays "This Administration Event is occurring while the order is on hold due to leave (Leave)."
- Override any alerts and click [Save Override(s)] and [Close].
- Click [Save].
- Validate a cell displays administration data for the time selected.
- Access 'Task List'.
- Search for and select "Client A" in the 'Search Clients' field.
- Validate the 'Dietary Oral-type' does not display.
- Click 'PRN Tasks'
- Validate the 'Lab' order is displayed, select the order, and click [Collect].
- Perform 'Order Acknowledgement' and 'Education'.
- Validate the 'Specimen Collection' dialog is displayed.
- Populate the required fields.
- Click [Alerts] and validate a warning displays "This Administration Event is occurring while the order is on hold due to leave (Leave)."
- Override any alerts and click [Save Override(s)] and [Close].
- Click [Sign].
- Access the Order Entry Console.
- Select the Dietary Oral-type order in the 'Order grid' and click [Resume], [Add to Scratchpad], and [Sign].
- Access 'Task List'.
- Click the 'Dietary-Oral Admin' for the next collection time.
- Click the checkbox for the order and click [Administer], [Acknowledge], and [Educate].
- Validate the 'Dietary-Oral Administration' dialog is displayed
- Populate the required fields.
- Click [Alerts], override any alerts and click [Save Override(s)] and [Close].
- Click [Sign].
|
Topics
• eMAR NX
|
Registry Settings - Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Practitioner Enrollment
- Client Charge Input
- Create Interim Billing Batch File
- Electronic Billing
- Crystal Reports or other SQL Reporting tool (PM Namespace)
- SOAPUI - WEBSVC.PractitionerRegister
- SOAPUI - AddPractitionerGuarantorCoverage
- SOAPUI - DeletePractitionerGuarantorCoverage
Scenario 1: Registry Setting - Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage
Steps
- Open the ‘Registry Settings’ form.
- Set the ‘Limit Registry Setting to the Following Search Criteria’ field to the ‘Validate Program For’.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Validate the ‘Registry Setting’ field equal to ‘Avatar PM->Practitioner->Enrollment->->->Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage’.
- Validate the ‘Registry Setting Details’ field contains ‘[FACILITY SPECIFIC] Enter 'Y' to add the 'Program' field to 'Practitioner Enrollment' (Guarantor Coverage). This will allow the service to be validated against the selected Programs when checking the Practitioner's Guarantor Coverage in the bills. Enter 'N' to remove the 'Program' field and the associated logic.’.
- Validate the ‘Registry Setting Value’ field defaults to ‘N’.
- Close the form.
- Open the ‘Practitioner Enrollment’ form.
- Select desired practitioner from the ‘Select Staff’ field.
- Select the ‘Guarantor Coverage’ section.
- Validate the ‘Guarantor Coverage’ section does not contain ‘Program’ field.
- Close the form.
- Open the ‘Registry Settings’ form.
- Set the ‘Limit Registry Setting to the Following Search Criteria’ field to the ‘Validate Program For’.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Validate the ‘Registry Setting’ field equals to ‘Avatar PM->Practitioner->Enrollment->->->Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage’.
- Set the ‘Registry Setting Value’ field to ‘Y’.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [OK].
- Click [No].
- Open the ‘Practitioner Enrollment’ form.
- Select desired practitioner from the ‘Select Staff’ field.
- Select the ‘Guarantor Coverage’ section.
- Validate the ‘Guarantor Coverage’ section contains ‘Program’ field.
- Validate the ‘Program’ value displays in scrolling text box.
- Close the form.
- Open the ‘Registry Settings’ form.
- Set the ‘Limit Registry Setting to the Following Search Criteria’ field to the ‘Validate Program For’.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Validate the ‘Registry Setting’ field equals to ‘Avatar PM->Practitioner->Enrollment->->->Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage’.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Set the ‘Registry Setting Value’ field to ‘1’.
- Validate the error dialog contains ‘The selected value is not valid in the current system code for the following reason: Invalid Response - Example:'Y' or 'N'’.
- Click [Enter].
- Click [OK].
- Set the ‘Registry Setting Value’ field to ‘m’.
- Validate the error dialog contains ‘The selected value is not valid in the current system code for the following reason: Invalid Response - Example:'Y' or 'N'’.
- Click [Enter].
- Click [OK].
- Set the ‘Registry Setting Value’ field to ‘YES’
- Validate the error dialog contains ‘The selected value is not valid in the current system code for the following reason: More than 1 characters.
- Click [OK].
- Set the ‘Registry Setting Value’ field to ‘’.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate the ‘Filing Error’ dialog box contains: ‘The following fields are missing: Registry Setting Value’.
- Click [OK].
- Set the ‘Registry Setting Value’ field to ‘Y’.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [OK].
- Click [No].
- Open the ‘Practitioner Enrollment’ form.
- Select the ‘Guarantor Coverage’ section.
- Select desired practitioner from the ‘Select Staff’ field.
- Select ‘Create New’ from the ‘Guarantor Coverage Entry’ field.
- Select desired guarantor from the Guarantor field.
- Select desired program(s) form the ‘Program’ field.
- Set the ‘Effective Date’ field to desired date.
- Set the ‘Lapse Date’ field to desired date.
- Click [File Mapping].
- Validate the ‘Filed!’ dialog box contains: ‘Saved. Please note: The changes will take effect when you submit the form.’
- Click [OK].
- Click [Submit].
- Open the ‘Practitioner Enrollment’ form.
- Select the same practitioner as above from the ‘Select Staff’ field.
- Select the ‘Guarantor Coverage’ section.
- Validate the ‘Guarantor Coverage’ text area contains ‘Guarantor’, ‘Program’, ‘Effective Date’ and ‘Lapse Date’ as defined in above steps.
- Click [Submit].
Scenario 2: 837 Professional bill - Validating 'Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage' registry setting
Specific Setup:
- Registry Setting:
- The 'Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage' registry setting is set to 'Y'.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- An existing guarantor is identified to be used and all the options are checked in the 'Inhibit Billing if Practitioner is not Covered by this Guarantor' field. Note the guarantor's code/name.
- Service codes:
- An existing service code is identified to be used. Note the service code/description.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the service code identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Practitioner Enrollment:
- An existing practitioner is identified, or a new practitioner is created. The guarantor coverage record for the staff is created that includes guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' and desired program(s). Note the guarantor and program.
- Admission:
- An existing client is identified, or a new client is admitted in a program which is defined in the guarantor coverage for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form. Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor.
- Client Charge Input:
- A service is rendered to the client. Note service date, service code.
- Client Ledger:
- A service distributed correctly to the assigned guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The service(s) rendered to the client is closed.
- Create Interim Billing Batch:
- An interim billing batch is created that includes desired client, service and the guarantor. Note the batch number.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Compile an unclaimed 837 Professional bill for the client.
- Verify the bill compiles successfully.
- Select 'Run Report' in 'Billing Options' field.
- Select 'Print' in 'Print Or Delete Report' field.
- Select the 'File' field.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Validate that the report launches successfully and contains correct client, service, and guarantor.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Open the 'Crystal Report' or any other SQL data viewer.
- Locate to the PM namespace.
- Query the 'Select * from SYSTEM.staff_guarantor_coverage'.
- Verify the 'ID' column displays unique id for the guarantor coverage entry created in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'STAFFID' column displays the correct practitioner id which is set up in the setup section.
- Verify the 'guarantor_id' column displays correct guarantor id for the guarantor assigned to the client in the 'Financial Eligibility' form.
- Verify the 'program_code' column displays correct program(s) code set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'program_shval' column displays correct program(s) description set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'program_value' column displays correct program(s) description set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'effective_date' column displays the correct date set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'lapse_date' column displays the correct date set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Close the 'Crystal Report' or SQL data viewer.
- Open the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form for the practitioner identified in the setup section.
- Select the 'Guarantor Coverage' section.
- Select an existing guarantor coverage entry from the 'Guarantor Coverage Entry' field.
- Verify the admission program is selected in the 'Program' field.
- Click [Delete Mapping].
- Click [Yes].
- [OK].
- Verify the guarantor coverage record removed from the 'Guarantor Coverage' text area.
- Select 'Create New' from the 'Guarantor Coverage Entry' field.
- Select the guarantor which is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor.
- Select the program different from the admission program of the client in the 'Program' field.
- Enter desired date in the 'Effective Date' and 'Lapse Date' fields.
- Click [File Mapping].
- Click [Submit].
- Verify the user navigates to the home page.
- Open 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Compile an unclaimed bill for the client.
- Validate that a message is received stating: No Valid Information Found. Please Check The Error Report.
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Run Report' in 'Billing Options'.
- Select 'Print' in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the 'File'.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Validate that the report launches and contains a link to 'Required Data Missing: Patient Claim Data'.
- Click the 'Required Data Missing: Patient Service Data' link.
- Verify that the error is - 'No Guarantor Coverage in Effect for Rendering Practitioner'.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Open the 'Crystal Report' or any other SQL data viewer.
- Locate to the PM namespace.
- Query the 'Select * from SYSTEM.staff_guarantor_coverage'.
- Verify the 'ID' column displays unique id for the guarantor coverage entry created in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'STAFFID' column displays the correct practitioner id which is set up in the setup section.
- Verify the 'guarantor_id' column displays correct guarantor id for the guarantor set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'program_code' column displays correct program(s) code for the program set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'program_shval' column displays correct program(s) description for the program set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'program_value' column displays correct program(s) description for the program set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'effective_date' column displays the correct date set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'lapse_date' column displays the correct date set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Close the 'Crystal Report' or SQL data viewer.
- Open the 'Registry Settings' form.
- Set the 'Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage' registry setting to 'N'.
- Click [Submit].
- Open the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form for the practitioner identified in the setup section.
- Select the 'Guarantor Coverage' section.
- Verify the guarantor coverage record exist in the 'Guarantor Coverage' text area.
- Close the form.
- Verify the user navigates to the home page.
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Compile an unclaimed 837 Professional bill for the client.
- Verify the bill compiles successfully.
- Select 'Run Report' in 'Billing Options' field.
- Select 'Print' in 'Print Or Delete Report' field.
- Select the 'File' field.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Validate that the report launches successfully and contains correct client, service, and guarantor.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Verify the user navigates to the home page.
Scenario 3: 837 Institutional bill - Validating 'Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage' registry setting
Specific Setup:
- Registry Setting:
- The 'Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage' registry setting is set to 'Y'.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- An existing guarantor is identified to be used and all the options are checked in the 'Inhibit Billing if Practitioner is not Covered by this Guarantor' field. Note the guarantor'scode/name.
- Service codes:
- An existing service code is identified to be used. Note the service code/description.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the service code identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Practitioner Enrollment:
- An existing practitioner is identified, or a new practitioner is created. The guarantor coverage record for the staff is created that includes guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' and desired program(s). Note the guarantor and program.
- Admission:
- An existing client is identified, or a new client is admitted in a program which is defined in the guarantor coverage for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form. Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor.
- Client Charge Input:
- A service is rendered to the client. Note service date, service code.
- Client Ledger:
- A service distributed correctly to the assigned guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The service(s) rendered to the client is closed.
- Create Interim Billing Batch:
- An interim billing batch is created that includes desired client, service and the guarantor. Note the batch number.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Compile an unclaimed 837 Institutional bill for the client.
- Verify the bill compiles successfully.
- Select 'Run Report' in 'Billing Options' field.
- Select 'Print' in 'Print Or Delete Report' field.
- Select the 'File' field.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Validate that the report launches successfully and contains correct client, service, and guarantor.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Open the 'Crystal Report' or any other SQL data viewer.
- Locate to the PM namespace.
- Query the 'Select * from SYSTEM.staff_guarantor_coverage'.
- Verify the 'ID' column displays unique id for the guarantor coverage entry created in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'STAFFID' column displays the correct practitioner id which is set up in the setup section.
- Verify the 'guarantor_id' column displays correct guarantor id for the guarantor assigned to the client in the 'Financial Eligibility' form.
- Verify the 'program_code' column displays correct program(s) code set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'program_shval' column displays correct program(s) description set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'program_value' column displays correct program(s) description set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'effective_date' column displays the correct date set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'lapse_date' column displays the correct date set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Close the 'Crystal Report' or SQL data viewer.
- Open the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form for the practitioner identified in the setup section.
- Select the 'Guarantor Coverage' section.
- Select an existing guarantor coverage entry from the 'Guarantor Coverage Entry' field.
- Verify the admission program is selected in the 'Program' field.
- Click [Delete Mapping].
- Click [Yes].
- [OK].
- Verify the guarantor coverage record for the admission program of the client is removed from the 'Guarantor Coverage' text area.
- Click [Submit].
- Open the 'Crystal Report' or any other SQL data viewer.
- Locate to the PM namespace.
- Query the 'Select * from SYSTEM.staff_guarantor_coverage'.
- Verify the guarantor coverage created for the client's admission program is deleted from the SQL table.
- Close the 'Crystal Report' or SQL data viewer.
- Verify the user navigates to the home page.
- Open 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Compile an unclaimed bill for the client.
- Validate that a message is received stating: No Valid Information Found. Please Check The Error Report.
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Run Report' in 'Billing Options'.
- Select 'Print' in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the 'File'.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Validate that the report launches and contains a link to 'Required Data Missing: Patient Claim Data'.
- Click the 'Required Data Missing: Patient Service Data' link.
- Verify that the error is - 'No Guarantor Coverage in Effect for Rendering Practitioner'.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Open the 'Registry Settings' form.
- Set the 'Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage' registry setting to 'N'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [OK].
- Click [No] on the [Form Return] dialog.
- Verify the user navigates to the home page.
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Compile an unclaimed 837 Institutional bill for the client.
- Verify the bill compiles successfully.
- Select 'Run Report' in 'Billing Options' field.
- Select 'Print' in 'Print Or Delete Report' field.
- Select the 'File' field.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Validate that the report launches successfully and contains correct client, service, and guarantor.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Verify the user navigates to the home page.
Scenario 4: WEBSVC.PractitionerRegister - AddPractitionerGuarantorCoverage / DeletePractitionerGuarantorCoverage - Registry setting 'Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage'
Specific Setup:
- Registry Setting:
- The 'Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage' registry setting is set to 'Y'.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- An existing guarantor is identified to be used and all the options are checked in the 'Inhibit Billing if Practitioner is not Covered by this Guarantor' field. Note the guarantor's code/name.
- Practitioner:
- An existing practitioner is identified, or a new practitioner is created. Note the practitioner id.
- Admission:
- An existing client is identified, or a new client is admitted in a desired program. Note the client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- The guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor.
Steps
- Access SOAPUI or any other web service tool.
- File the 'AddPractitionerGuarantorCoverage' method of the WEBSVC.PractitionerRegister web service for the desired guarantor and practitioner by entering desired value to the 'Guarantor', 'EffectiveDate', 'LapseDate','Program', and 'PractitionerID' fields. Note all the values.
- Verify the web service files successfully.
- Open the 'Crystal Report' or any other SQL data viewer.
- Locate to the PM namespace.
- Query the 'Select * from SYSTEM.staff_guarantor_coverage'.
- Verify the 'ID' column displays unique id for the guarantor coverage entry created in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form. Note this 'ID' number for later use.
- Verify the 'STAFFID' column displays the correct practitioner id which is set up in the setup section.
- Verify the 'guarantor_id' column displays correct guarantor id for the guarantor assigned to the client in the 'Financial Eligibility' form.
- Verify the 'program_code' column displays correct program(s) code set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'program_shval' column displays correct program(s) description set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'program_value' column displays correct program(s) description set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'effective_date' column displays the correct date set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Verify the 'lapse_date' column displays the correct date set up in the guarantor coverage entry for the practitioner in the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form.
- Close the 'Crystal Report' or SQL data viewer.
- Login to myAvatar.
- Open the 'Practitioner Enrollment' form for the practitioner identified in the setup section.
- Select the 'Guarantor Coverage' section.
- Verify the guarantor coverage entry created through the 'AddPractitionerGuarantorCoverage' is available in the 'Guarantor Coverage Entry' text area.
- Close the form.
- Open the 'Client Charge Input' form.
- Render a service to the client identified in the setup section. Note the service date, service code.
- Open the 'Client Ledger' form.
- Verify the service distributed correctly to the assigned guarantor.
- Open the 'Close Charges' form.
- Close the service rendered to the client.
- Open the 'Create Interim Billing Batch' form.
- Create an interim billing batch that includes desired client, service, and the guarantor. Note the batch number.
- Close the form.
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Compile an unclaimed 837 Professional bill for the client.
- Verify the bill compiles successfully.
- Select 'Run Report' in 'Billing Options' field.
- Select 'Print' in 'Print Or Delete Report' field.
- Select the 'File' field.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Validate that the report launches successfully and contains correct client, service, and guarantor.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Access SOAPUI or any other web service tool.
- Locate to the 'DeletePractitionerGuarantorCoverage' method of the WEBSVC.PractitionerRegister web service.
- Enter the practitioner id in the 'PractitionerID' field which is used in the 'AddPractitionerGuarantorCoverage' method.
- Enter the value noted above from the 'ID' field of the SYSTEM.staff_guarantor_coverage SQL table in the 'PractitionerGuarantorCoverageID' field.
- Submit the request.
- Verify the web service files successfully.
- Open the 'Crystal Report' or any other SQL data viewer.
- Locate to the PM namespace.
- Query the 'Select * from SYSTEM.staff_guarantor_coverage'.
- Verify the row with the ID used in the 'DeletePractitionerGuarantorCoverage' is deleted.
- Close the report.
- Open 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Compile an unclaimed bill for the client.
- Validate that a message is received stating: No Valid Information Found. Please Check The Error Report.
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Run Report' in 'Billing Options'.
- Select 'Print' in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the 'File'.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Validate that the report launches and contains a link to 'Required Data Missing: Patient Claim Data'.
- Click the 'Required Data Missing: Patient Service Data' link.
- Verify that the error is - 'No Guarantor Coverage in Effect for Rendering Practitioner'.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Open the 'Registry Settings' form.
- Set the 'Validate Program For Staff Guarantor Coverage' registry setting to 'N'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [OK].
- Click [No] on the [Form Return] dialog.
- Verify the user navigates to the home page.
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Compile an unclaimed 837 Professional bill for the client.
- Verify the bill compiles successfully.
- Select 'Run Report' in 'Billing Options' field.
- Select 'Print' in 'Print Or Delete Report' field.
- Select the 'File' field.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Validate that the report launches successfully and contains correct client, service, and guarantor.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Verify the user navigates to the home page.
|
Topics
• Registry Settings
• Practitioner
• 837 Professional
• 837 Institutional
• Web Services
|
File Import
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: File Import - Service Codes
Specific Setup:
- File Import:
- Create an import file for adding new Service Code "File A".
- Create an import file for editing the above Service Code: "File B".
Steps
- Open the "File Import" form.
- Select the 'Service Codes' in the 'File Type' field.
- Select 'Upload New File' in the 'Action' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select "File A".
- Select 'Compile/Validate File' in the 'Action' field.
- Select "File A" in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the message = 'Compiled'.
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Post File' in the 'Action' field.
- Select "File A" in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the message = 'Posted'.
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Print File' in the 'Action' field.
- Select "File A" in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the Report.
- Click [Close Report].
- Click [Discard]
- Click [Yes]
- Open the "Service Codes" form.
- Click [Edit].
- Enter the 'Service Code'.
- Validate the fields of the form.
- Close the form.
- Repeat Steps 1-27 for Service Code Edit -'File B'.
|
Topics
• Service Codes
• File Import
|
Quick Billing Rule Definition
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Quick Billing Rule Definition
Scenario 1: Quick Billing Rule Definition - Help Message on File Description
Steps
- Open the "Quick Billing Rule Definition" form.
- Click the [File Description] help button.
- Validate in the field description that the special characters '<' and '>' display correctly.
- Click the [Return To Form] link.
- Click the [Discard] button.
|
Topics
• Quick Billing
|
Remittance Processing - Future Functionality
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Client Charge Input
- Remittance Processing Widget
- Delete Service (Open Service Only)
- Delete Last Movement
- Change MR#
Internal Test Only
|
Topics
n/a
|
File Import - DRG Code Table
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: PM - File Import - DRG Code Table - Validating an 837 institutional bill
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- The 'Enable DRG Codes' must be enabled.
- The 'Import File Delimiter' registry setting is set to value to "2".. This will change the delimiter type to tabs.
- Site Specific Section Modeling:
- Field 'DRG Code (ICD-10)' must be added to Avatar PM 'Diagnosis' form.
- The following file import files are created to add and/or update the DRG Code Table. Note the location and of the files.
- File import file to add 2-digit DRG code in the system.
- File import file to delete the 2-digit DRG code from the system.
- File import file to update the 2-digit DRG code to 3-digit DRG code by adding leading zero in the system.
- Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults:
- The 'Enable Using DRG Code In 2300-HI-Diagnosis Related Group (DRG) Information' must be set to 'Yes' in applicable template for 837 Institutional billing file generation.
- Access to Crystal Reports or other SQL reporting tool.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- An existing guarantor is identified to be used. Note the guarantor's code/name.
- Service codes:
- An existing service code is identified to be used. Note the service code/description.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the service code identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the desired program. Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- The guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form is assigned to the client as the primary guarantor.
- Diagnosis:
- Diagnosis record exists with value for 'DRG Code (ICD-10)' included/filed.
- Client Charge Input:
- A service is rendered to the client. Note service date, service code.
- Client Ledger:
- The service distributed correctly to the assigned guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- Create Interim Billing Batch File:
- An interim billing batch is created to include client, services and guarantor in the batch. Note the batch number.
Steps
- Open 'File Import' form.
- Select "DRG Code Table" from the 'File Type'.
- Select "Upload New File" in the 'Action' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select 'DRG Code Table' import file to import 2-digit DRG code.
- Click [Open].
- Select "Compile/Validate File" in the 'Action' field.
- Select loaded import file.
- Click [Process Action].
- Verify that 'Compile/Validate File' action completes, and message 'Compiled' is displayed.
- Click 'OK' button.
- Select "Print File" in 'Action' field to view successfully compiled import data.
- Select compiled import file.
- Click [Process Action].
- In 'DRG Code Table' File Import Report, verify that all valid import row(s) are included in the report with segment/value details.
- Select "Post File" in 'Action' field to post successfully compiled import data.
- Select compiled import file.
- Click [Process Action].
- Verify that 'Compile/Validate File' action completes, and message 'Posted' is displayed.
- Open Crystal Reports or other SQL reporting tool.
- Access the SQL table 'SYSTEM.file_import_drg_codes'.
- Verify that all 'DRG Code Table' File Import rows are included in the table with values from the import data file.
- Access the 'SYSTEM.table_drg_codes' table.
- Verify that all successfully posted 'DRG Code Table' File Import rows are reflected as new (or updated) DRG Code entries in table.
- Repeat the steps from 1 through 24 to update the 2 digit code with leading zero.
- Open the 'Diagnosis' form.
- Add/update the diagnosis record for the client for the date of service.
- Select the updated DRG code to the diagnosis record.
- Submit the form.
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select 837 Institutional in 'Billing Form' field.
- Select values for 837 bill generation in the 'Type of Bill', 'Individual or All Guarantors' and 'Billing Type' fields.
- Select "Sort File" in the 'Billing Options' field.
- Select/enter values for service inclusion in 'All Clients or Interim Billing Batch', 'Program(s)'
- Select value for 'Create Claims' field (and enter value for 'Date of Claim' if 'Yes').
- Enter/select values 'First Date of Service to Include' and 'Last Date of Service to Include' fields.
- Enter/select values for any other bill sorting criteria fields as required/desired.
- Click [Process].
- Verify the bill compiles successfully.
- Select 'Dump File' in the 'Billing Options' field.
- Select 837 file generated.
- Click [Process].
- For 837 Institutional format billing files generated - ensure that the 'DRG Code (ICD-10)' value associated to applicable Diagnosis record/entries for service(s) included in bill is present in 2300-HI-Diagnosis Related Group (DRG) Information claim loop. (Example: 'HI*ABK:O2402:::::::Y~HI*ABJ:O24013~HI*DR:079')
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
Scenario 2: PM - 'File Import' - Add / Edit / Delete 'DRG Code Table' Import
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- The 'Enable DRG Codes' must be enabled.
- The 'Import File Delimiter' registry setting is set to "2". This will change the delimiter type to tabs.
- The file import record layout for the Avatar 'DRG Code Table' is available for the user.
- The file import files are created for the Avatar 'DRG Code Table to add, update and delete the DRG Code Table. Note the location of the files.
- Access to Crystal Reports or other SQL reporting tool
Steps
- Open 'File Import' form.
- Select "DRG Code Table" from the 'File Type' field.
- Select "Upload New File" in the 'Action' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select 'DRG Code Table' import file to add the new DRG code to the table.
- Click [Open].
- Select "Compile/Validate File" in the 'Action' field.
- Select recently loaded import file.
- Click [Process Action].
- Verify that 'Compile/Validate File' action completes, and message 'Compiled' is displayed.
- Click [OK].
- Select "Print File" in the 'Action' field to view successfully compiled import data.
- Select successfully compiled import file.
- Click [Process Action].
- Verify all valid import row(s) are included in the report.
- Select "Post File" in the 'Action' field to post successfully compiled import data.
- Select successfully compiled import file.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the message 'Posted' is displayed.
- Query - select * from SYSTEM.file_import_drg_codes
- Validate the' add_edit_code' cell is equal to "A".
- Validate the 'add_edit_value' cell is equal to "Add".
- Validate the 'Code_set_code' cell is equal to "ICD10".
- Validate the 'drg_code' cell is equal to the DRG code added in the import file.
- Validate the drg_value cell is equal to description of the code added in the import file.
- Verify the 'pkey' cell exists.
- Query - select * from SYSTEM.table_drg_codes.
- Validate the 'drg_code' cell is equal to the DRG code added in the import file.
- Validate the drg_value cell is equal to description of the code added in the import file.
- Validate the ID cell is equal to the system generated unique id which will be used in the 'pkey' column of the import file. Note the ID.
- Close the report.
- Repeat steps 1 through 19 to import the file import file to edit an existing DRG code in the table.
- Query - select * from SYSTEM.file_import_drg_codes
- Validate the' add_edit_code' cell is equal to "E".
- Validate the 'add_edit_value' cell is equal to "Edit".
- Validate the 'Code_set_code' cell is equal to "ICD10".
- Validate the 'drg_code' cell is equal to the updated DRG code as listed in the import file.
- Validate the drg_value cell is equal to description of the code added in the import file.
- Verify the 'pkey' cell exists.
- Validate the ‘pkey’ column displays the correct value as listed in the import file.
- Query - select * from SYSTEM.table_drg_codes.
- Validate the 'drg_code' cell is equal to the updated DRG code as listed in the import file.
- Validate the drg_value cell is equal to description of the code added in the import file.
- Verify the 'pkey' cell exists.
- Validate the ‘pkey’ column displays the correct value as listed in the import file.
- Close the report.
- Repeat steps 1 through 19 to import the file import file to delete an existing DRG code from the table.
- Query - select * from SYSTEM.file_import_drg_codes
- Validate the' add_edit_code' cell is equal to "D".
- Validate the 'add_edit_value' cell is equal to "Delete".
- Validate the 'Code_set_code' cell is equal to "ICD10".
- Validate the 'drg_code' cell is equal to the DRG code added in the import file.
- Validate the drg_value cell is equal to description of the code added in the import file.
- Verify the 'pkey' cell exists.
- Validate the ‘pkey’ column displays the correct value as listed in the import file.
- Query - select * from SYSTEM.table_drg_codes.
- Validate the 'drg_code' cell does not contain the deleted DRG code which is listed to be deleted in the import file.
- Close the report.
Financial Determination - Field Verification
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: 'Financial Determination' - filing financial determination for a client
Specific Setup:
- Dictionary Update:
- User must populate the following Client dictionary tables: 7104, 7108, 7110, 7113, 7118, 7127, and 7131.
- Registry Setting:
- The 'Include Enhanced Limits' setting must be enabled.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- An existing guarantor is identified to be used. Note the guarantor's code/name.
- Admission:
- An existing client is identified, or a new client is admitted. Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- The guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form is assigned to the client as the primary guarantor.
- User Definition:
- User has access to the 'Financial Determination Configuration' and 'Financial Determination' forms.
- Financial Determination Configuration:
- Select "Create New" in the 'Configuration' field.
- Enter the leap year day (i.e. 2/29/2024) in the 'Effective Date' field.
- Do not enter any value in the 'Expiration Date' field.
- Enter desired amount in the 'Lump Sum Value Is Net Assets Plus' field.
- Enter desired amount in the 'FICA Tax Rate' field.
- Enter desired amount in the 'Room And Board' field.
- Enter desired amount in the 'Default Income Percentage For Ability To Pay' field.
- Enter desired amount in the 'Each Additional Dependent' field.
Steps
- Select desired client and access the 'Financial Determination' form.
- Enter the leap year day (ex. 02/29/2024) in the 'Effective Date' field.
- Do not enter any value in the 'Expiration Date' field.
- Verify the 'Expiration Date' field is auto populated with the desired date (i.e. 02/28/2025).
- Clear the date from the 'Expiration Date' field.
- Change the 'Effective Date' field to non leap year day (i.e. 02/28/2022).
- Verify the 'Expiration Date' field is auto populated with the desired date (i.e. 02/27/2023).
- Clear the date from the 'Expiration Date' field.
- Change the 'Effective Date' field to non leap year day (i.e. 04/20/2024).
- Verify the 'Expiration Date' field is auto populated with the desired date (i.e. 04/19/2025).
- Select desired value in the 'Active?' field.
- Select desired value in the 'Residence Type' field.
- Select "Create New" in the 'Determination Information' field.
- Select desired value in the 'Determination Method' field.
- Select "Create New" in the 'Included Assets' field.
- Select desired value in the 'Asset Type' field.
- Enter desired value in the 'Asset Value' field.
- Select "Create New" in the 'Expense' field.
- Select desired value in the 'Expense Type' field.
- Select "Monthly" in the 'Expense Time' field.
- Enter desired value in the 'Expense Value' field.
- Validate the 'Total Assets' field contains desired amount.
- Validate the 'Net Value Of Excluded Assets' field contains desired value.
- Validate the 'Total Liabilities' field contains desired value.
- Validate the 'Protected Assets' field contains desired value.
- Validate the 'Net Assets' field contains desired value.
- Validate the 'Total Income' field contains desired value.
- Validate the 'Total Expenses' field contains desired value.
- Validate the 'Protected Income' field contains desired value.
- Validate the 'Net Income' field contains desired value.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate all the fields filled out in the previous steps remain filled out.
- Close the form.
|
Topics
• Diagnosis
• 837 Institutional
• File Import
• Financial Determination
|
The 'Age Display Format' registry setting
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Pre Admit
- Family Registration
- Client Medical Conditions
Scenario 1: Admission - Validate the 'Age Display Format' registry setting
Steps
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Validate the 'Registry Setting Details' field contains: This registry setting accepts the values "1", "2", or "3", to customize the format of age across various forms and widgets, including 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit', 'Call Intake', 'Client Header', and the 'Client Information' widget. Selecting "1" enables a simplified age display, presenting only the clients' age in years across all specified forms and widgets. Selecting "2", a more detailed age field is made visible and the display of age only in years is hidden on the 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit' and 'Call Intake' forms. For clients older than three years, age is shown in months and years, while for those under three, age is shown in days, months, and years. Selecting "3" allows for clients under 3 years old to display their age in months, and those under 2 years to display their age in months and days. All clients aged 3 and above will display age in years only.
- Enter "1" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Admission' form.
- Populate all required fields to admit a new client. This will be referred to as "Client A".
- Enter the desired value in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "2" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Enter a date making the client older than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years and months.
- Enter a date making the client less than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years, months, and days.
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "3" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Enter a date making the client older than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years.
- Enter a date making the client between 2-3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in months.
- Enter a date making the client less than 2 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in months and days.
- Close the form.
Scenario 2: Admission (Outpatient) - Validate the 'Age Display Format' registry setting
Steps
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Validate the 'Registry Setting Details' field contains: This registry setting accepts the values "1", "2", or "3", to customize the format of age across various forms and widgets, including 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit', 'Call Intake', 'Client Header', and the 'Client Information' widget. Selecting "1" enables a simplified age display, presenting only the clients' age in years across all specified forms and widgets. Selecting "2", a more detailed age field is made visible and the display of age only in years is hidden on the 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit' and 'Call Intake' forms. For clients older than three years, age is shown in months and years, while for those under three, age is shown in days, months, and years. Selecting "3" allows for clients under 3 years old to display their age in months, and those under 2 years to display their age in months and days. All clients aged 3 and above will display age in years only.
- Enter "1" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Admission (Outpatient)' form.
- Populate all required fields to admit a new client. This will be referred to as "Client A".
- Enter the desired value in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "2" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission (Outpatient)' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Enter a date making the client older than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years and months.
- Enter a date making the client less than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years, months, and days.
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "3" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission (Outpatient)' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Enter a date making the client older than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years.
- Enter a date making the client between 2-3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in months.
- Enter a date making the client less than 2 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in months and days.
- Close the form.
Scenario 3: Call Intake - Validate the 'Age Display Format' registry setting
Specific Setup:
- The 'Add Demographics To Call Intake' registry setting must be set to "Y" in Cal-PM systems.
Steps
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Validate the 'Registry Setting Details' field contains: This registry setting accepts the values "1", "2", or "3", to customize the format of age across various forms and widgets, including 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit', 'Call Intake', 'Client Header', and the 'Client Information' widget. Selecting "1" enables a simplified age display, presenting only the clients' age in years across all specified forms and widgets. Selecting "2", a more detailed age field is made visible and the display of age only in years is hidden on the 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit' and 'Call Intake' forms. For clients older than three years, age is shown in months and years, while for those under three, age is shown in days, months, and years. Selecting "3" allows for clients under 3 years old to display their age in months, and those under 2 years to display their age in months and days. All clients aged 3 and above will display age in years only.
- Enter "1" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Call Intake' form.
- Populate all required fields to admit a client into a 'Call Intake' program. This will be referred to as "Client A".
- Enter the desired value in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "2" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Call Intake' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Enter a date making the client older than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years and months.
- Enter a date making the client less than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years, months, and days.
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "3" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Call Intake' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Enter a date making the client older than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years.
- Enter a date making the client between 2-3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in months.
- Enter a date making the client less than 2 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in months and days.
- Close the form.
Scenario 4: Pre Admit - Validate the 'Age Display Format' registry setting
Steps
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Validate the 'Registry Setting Details' field contains: This registry setting accepts the values "1", "2", or "3", to customize the format of age across various forms and widgets, including 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit', 'Call Intake', 'Client Header', and the 'Client Information' widget. Selecting "1" enables a simplified age display, presenting only the clients' age in years across all specified forms and widgets. Selecting "2", a more detailed age field is made visible and the display of age only in years is hidden on the 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit' and 'Call Intake' forms. For clients older than three years, age is shown in months and years, while for those under three, age is shown in days, months, and years. Selecting "3" allows for clients under 3 years old to display their age in months, and those under 2 years to display their age in months and days. All clients aged 3 and above will display age in years only.
- Enter "1" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Pre Admit' form.
- Populate all required fields to admit a new client into a Pre Admit program. This will be referred to as "Client A".
- Enter the desired value in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "2" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Pre Admit' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Enter a date making the client older than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years and months.
- Enter a date making the client less than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years, months, and days.
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "3" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Pre Admit' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Enter a date making the client older than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years.
- Enter a date making the client between 2-3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in months.
- Enter a date making the client less than 2 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in months and days.
- Close the form.
Scenario 5: Family Registration - Validate the 'Age Display Format' registry setting
Specific Setup:
- A client is enrolled in an existing episode (Client A).
Steps
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Validate the 'Registry Setting Details' field contains: This registry setting accepts the values "1", "2", or "3", to customize the format of age across various forms and widgets, including 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit', 'Call Intake', 'Client Header', and the 'Client Information' widget. Selecting "1" enables a simplified age display, presenting only the clients' age in years across all specified forms and widgets. Selecting "2", a more detailed age field is made visible and the display of age only in years is hidden on the 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit' and 'Call Intake' forms. For clients older than three years, age is shown in months and years, while for those under three, age is shown in days, months, and years. Selecting "3" allows for clients under 3 years old to display their age in months, and those under 2 years to display their age in months and days. All clients aged 3 and above will display age in years only.
- Enter "1" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Family Registration' form.
- Enter the desired value in the 'Select Family' dialog and click [New Family]. This will be referred to as "Family A".
- Enter the desired value in the 'Family Name' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Family Activation Date' field.
- Select the "Family Members" section.
- Click [Add New Item].
- Select "Client A" in the 'Client ID#' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Start Date Of Family Membership' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age at Time of Data Entry' field contains the client's age in years.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "2" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Family Registration' form.
- Search for and select "Family A" in the 'Select Family' dialog.
- Select the "Family Members" section.
- Select "Client A" in the 'Family Membership Information' grid and click [Edit Selected Item].
- Enter a date making the client older than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age at Time of Data Entry' field contains the client's age in years and months.
- Enter a date making the client less than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age at Time of Data Entry' field contains the client's age in years, months, and days.
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "3" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Family Registration' form.
- Search for and select "Family A" in the 'Select Family' dialog.
- Select the "Family Members" section.
- Select "Client A" in the 'Family Membership Information' grid and click [Edit Selected Item].
- Enter a date making the client older than 3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age at Time of Data Entry' field contains the client's age in years.
- Enter a date making the client between 2-3 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age at Time of Data Entry' field contains the client's age in months.
- Enter a date making the client less than 2 years old in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Validate the 'Age at Time of Data Entry' field contains the client's age in months and days.
- Close the form.
Scenario 6: Validate the 'Age Display Format' registry setting in the 'Client Header' and 'Client Information' widget
Specific Setup:
- A client is enrolled in an existing episode (Client A).
- The 'Client Information' widget must be accessible on the HomeView.
Steps
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Validate the 'Registry Setting Details' field contains: This registry setting accepts the values "1", "2", or "3", to customize the format of age across various forms and widgets, including 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit', 'Call Intake', 'Client Header', and the 'Client Information' widget. Selecting "1" enables a simplified age display, presenting only the clients' age in years across all specified forms and widgets. Selecting "2", a more detailed age field is made visible and the display of age only in years is hidden on the 'Admission', 'Admission (OutPatient)', 'Family Registration', 'Pre Admit' and 'Call Intake' forms. For clients older than three years, age is shown in months and years, while for those under three, age is shown in days, months, and years. Selecting "3" allows for clients under 3 years old to display their age in months, and those under 2 years to display their age in months and days. All clients aged 3 and above will display age in years only.
- Enter "1" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Enter the desired value in the 'Date Of Birth' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Client Information' widget.
- Validate the 'Age' field contains the client's age in years.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Validate the 'Client Header' displays the client's age in years.
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "2" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Client Information' widget.
- Validate the 'Age' field displays the client's age in:
- Months and years if the client is older than 3 years old.
- Months, years, and days if the client is under 3 years old.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Validate the 'Client Header' displays the client's age in:
- Months and years if the client is older than 3 years old.
- Months, years, and days if the client is under 3 years old.
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' Form.
- Enter the 'Age Display Format' in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "3" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Client Information' widget.
- Validate the 'Age' field displays the client's age in:
- Years if the client is older than 3 years old.
- Months if the client is between 2 and 3 years old.
- Months and days if the client is under 2 years old.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission' form.
- Click [Edit].
- Validate the 'Client Header' displays the client's age in:
- Years if the client is older than 3 years old.
- Months if the client is between 2 and 3 years old.
- Months and days if the client is under 2 years old.
- Close the form.
|
Topics
• Registry Settings
• Admission
• NX
• Admission (Outpatient)
• Call Intake
• Pre Admit
• Family Registration
• Widgets
• Client Header
|
Cross Episode Financial Eligibility - Policy number
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Cross Episode Financial Eligibility
Scenario 1: Cross Episode Financial Eligibility - Policy Number Verification
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set the 'Avatar PM->Client Information->Client Demographics->->->Additional Fields Registry Setting Value' to the value that covers the value to add 'Additional Policy Numbers'.
- Set the 'Avatar PM->Billing->Financial Eligibility->->->Enable Default Guarantor Assignment' to 'Y'.
- Default Guarantor Assignment:
- A guarantor is defined to default in 'Cross Episode Financial Eligibility' upon the filing of admission. Note the guarantor code/name.
- Admission (Outpatient):
- A new client is admitted. The guarantor defined above and the policy number of the guarantor are added in the 'Demographics' section. Note the client id, value of the 'Guarantor 1' field and the value added in the 'Policy Number 1' field.
Steps
- Open the 'Cross Episode Financial Eligibility' form.
- Validate the 'Guarantor #1' field populated correctly with the guarantor added in the 'Demographics' section of the admission form of the client.
- Navigate to the 'Guarantor Selection' section.
- Validate the 'Subscriber Policy #' is populated correctly with the policy number of the guarantor added in the 'Demographics' section of the admission form of the client.
- Click [Submit].
- Open the 'Default Guarantor Assignment' form.
- Select desired guarantor in the 'Select Guarantor to Default' field.
- Select the 'Filing of Admission' option in the 'Default the Guarantor(s) During' field.
- Select the 'Financial Eligibility' in the 'Add the Guarantor(s) to Which Form' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Open the 'Admission' or Admission(Outpatient)' form.
- Admit a new client.
- Navigate to the 'Demographics' section.
- Add the guarantor used in the 'Default Guarantor Assignment' form and add a policy number.
- Click [Submit].
- Open the 'Financial Eligibility' form.
- Validate the 'Guarantor #1' field populated correctly with the guarantor added in the 'Demographics' section of the admission form of the client.
- Navigate to the 'Guarantor Selection' section.
- Validate the 'Subscriber Policy #' is populated correctly with the policy number of the guarantor added in the 'Demographics' section of the admission form of the client.
- Click [Submit].
NCPDP Response screen - Spelling error
Scenario 1: RXConnect - PM - NCPDP responses to RxConnect - Validating spelling error
SYSTEM.billing_guar_table - field validation
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Form and Table Documentation (PM)
Scenario 1: SYSTEM.billing_guar_table' - field validations
Specific Setup:
- Guarantors/Payors:
- An existing non contract guarantor is identified that has data on file for the following field. Note the guarantor code/name and value from the field.
- Guarantors/Payors section:
- 837 Section:
- Value to Display in 2330B NM1-09/2430 SVD-01
- Review the help message associated with this field.
- Guarantor/Program Bulling Defaults:
- 837 Professional section:
- Payer Identification # (2010BB/2330B-NM1-09)
- 837 Institutional section:
- Payer Identification Number
Steps
- Open the 'Crystal Report' or any other data viewer.
- Query the 'SYSTEM.billing_guar_table' for the guarantors identified in the setup section.
- Verify the 'value_to_display_in_2330B_code' and 'value_to_display_in_2330B_value' fields are added to the 'SYSTEM.billing_guar_table.
- Verify that the 'value_to_display_in_2330B_code' and 'value_to_display_in_2330B_value' displays data correctly based on the data set up in the 'Value to Display in 2330B NM1-09/2430 SVD-01' field of the 'Guarantors/Payors' form and the 'Payer Identification # (2010BB/2330B-NM1-09)' field set up in the 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' form.
- Close the report.
|
Topics
• Cross Episode Financial Eligibility
• Dictionary
• Guarantor/Payors
• Database Tables
|
Dictionary Update - extended dictionary is added for the 'Certification Category' field.
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- BBH Setup
- Adult/Child Eligibility Category
- Client Charge Input
- Electronic Billing
Scenario 1: Registry Setting - Enable BBH Service Modifiers
Steps
- Open the "Registry Settings" form.
- Enable the registry setting "Enable BBH Service Modifiers".
- Open the "User Definition" form.
- Validate the 2 forms "BBH Setup" and "Adult/Child Eligibility Category" are visible.
- Give the user access to the "BBH Setup" form and the "Adult/Child Eligibility Category" form.
- Refresh menus.
- Validate the "BBH Setup" form can be opened.
- Validate the "Adult/Child Eligibility Category" form can be opened.
- Open the "Registry Settings" form.
- Disable the registry setting "Enable BBH Service Modifiers".
- Open the "User Definition" form.
- Validate the 2 forms "BBH Setup" and "Adult/Child Eligibility Category" are no longer visible.
- Refresh menus.
- Validate the "BBH Setup" form is no longer available.
- Validate the "Adult/Child Eligibility Category" is no longer available.
Scenario 2: Adult/Child Eligibility Category - Field validations
Specific Setup:
- Open the "Registry Settings" form.
- Enable the registry setting "Enable BBH Service Modifiers".
- Open the "User Definition" form.
- Give the user access to the "BBH Setup" form and the "Adult/Child Eligibility Category" form.
- Refresh menus.
- Open the "BBH Setup" form.
- Select the "Guarantor(s)" to include.in BBH processing by selecting them in the "Avatar Guarantors for BBH".
- Select any service codes desired to be excluded from BBH processing.
- Select any programs to excluded from BBH processing.
- Navigate to the "Certification Category Setup" section and enter all certification categories that apply.
- Establish effective and lapse dates of this eligibility category.
- Establish "Modifier 1" and "Modifier 2" for the certification category.
- At a minimum, establish a "No Eligibility" category to avoid any billing issues with any client assigned to a guarantor that is included in BBH Setup, but for whom there is no specific BBH setup.
- Admit a test client into any episode that is not excluded in the "BBH Setup" form.
Steps
- Open the "Adult/Child Eligibility Category" form.
- Add a row by filing in all required fields and submitting the form.
- Submit the form.
- Add another row.
- Edit a row by changing some data.
- Retrieve the edited row and validate the changes are reflected.
- Delete a row and validate it's been removed.
Scenario 3: 837P - BBH Modifiers
Specific Setup:
- Open the "Registry Settings" form.
- Enable the registry setting "Enable BBH Service Modifiers".
- Open the "User Definition" form.
- Give the user access to the "BBH Setup" form and the "Adult/Child Eligibility Category" form.
- Refresh menus.
- Open the "BBH Setup" form.
- Select the "Guarantor(s)" to include.in BBH processing by selecting them in the "Avatar Guarantors for BBH".
- Select any service codes desired to be excluded from BBH processing.
- Select any programs to excluded from BBH processing.
- Set any modifiers that must be first position modifiers in the SV1 segment of the 837 Professional file.
- Set any modifiers that must be last position modifiers in the SV1 segment of the 837 Professional file.
- Navigate to the "Certification Category Setup" section and enter all certification categories that apply.
- Establish effective and lapse dates of this eligibility category.
- Establish "Modifier 1" and "Modifier 2" for the certification category.
- At a minimum, establish a "No Eligibility" category to avoid any billing issues with any client assigned to a guarantor that is included in BBH Setup, but for whom there is no specific BBH setup.
- Admit a test client into any program.
- Using the "Adult/Child Eligibility Category" form.
- Add a row of data for the test client.
- Select an episode to assign this data to.
- Select "Adult" in the "Adult or Child" field.
- Enter a Start date and an End Date.
- Select a "Certification Category".
- Using the "Financial Eligibility" form.
- Assign the test client to a guarantor. Select a guarantor selected in the "BBH Setup" form.
- Be sure to fill out all required fields.
- Populate the "Social Security Number" and "Subscriber Policy" fields.
- Using the "Diagnosis" form.
- Add diagnosis data for the test client.
- Using "Client Charge Input" form.
- Enter in at least one service. Be sure to use a service code that is specified in the "BBH Setup" form.
- Using the "Close Charges" form.
- Close charges for the test client.
Steps
- Using the "Electronic Billing" form.
- Generate an 837 Professional file that includes the BBH covered guarantor, service, and program.
- Validate the modifiers in the SV1 segment, where the first modifier is equal to Modifier 1 from the appropriate certification category as set up in "BBH Defaults" form.
- Also, validate the modifiers in the SV1 segment, where the last modifier is equal to Modifier 2 from the appropriate certification category as set up in "BBH Defaults" form.
- Using the "BBH Setup" form.
- Edit an existing row to add a value to the "First Modifier" and for the "Last Modifier".
- Using the "Electronic Billing" form.
- Generate an 837 Professional file that includes the BBH covered guarantor, service, and program.
- Validate the modifiers in the SV1 segment, where the first modifier is equal to a modifier from the "First Position Modifiers" field from the appropriate certification category as set up in "BBH Defaults" form.
- Validate the modifiers in the SV1 segment, where the last modifier is equal to a modifier from the "Last Position Modifiers" field from the appropriate certification category as set up in "BBH Defaults" form.
- Open the "Registry Settings" form.
- Disable the registry setting "Enable BBH Service Modifiers" by setting it to "N" for "No".
- Open the "Electronic Billing" form.
- Generate an 837 Professional file for the client and service created for this test.
- Validate there are no modifiers from any "BBH Setup" in the SV1 segment.
Scenario 4: BBH Setup Form - Field Validations
Specific Setup:
- Open the "Registry Settings" form.
- Enable the registry setting "Enable BBH Service Modifiers".
- Open the "User Definition" form.
- Give the user access to the "BBH Setup" form.
- Refresh menus.
Steps
- Open the "BBH Setup" form.
- Populate each field on the form.
- Add multiple rows in the "Certification Category" table.
- File the form.
- Open the "BBH Setup" form.
- Validate the fields re display as they were previously filed.
- Edit one of the rows in the "Certification Category" table.
- Delete a row from the table.
- Open the "BBH Setup" form.
- Ensure that a default eligibility category of "Not Eligible" is established.
|
Topics
• 837 Professional
• Registry Settings
|
|
Topics
• Program Maintenance
• Single Program Maintenance
• File Import
|
Various SQL views changed to SQL tables
Scenario 1: Validating SYSTEM.billing_837_d_report switched from a SQL view to an SQL table
Specific Setup:
- An 837 Dental report file has been created by the "Electronic Billing" process for 837 Dental files.
Steps
- Using the preferred method of viewing SQL tables, validate SYSTEM.billing_837_d_report is no longer an SQL view, and is now a table.
Scenario 2: Validating SYSTEM.billing_837_i_report switched from a SQL view to an SQL table
Specific Setup:
- An 837 Institutional report file has been created by the "Electronic Billing" process for 837 Institutional files.
Steps
- Using the preferred method of viewing SQL tables, validate SYSTEM.billing_837_i_report is no longer an SQL view, and is now a table.
Scenario 3: Validating SYSTEM.billing_837_p_report switched from a SQL view to an SQL table
Specific Setup:
- An 837 Professional report file has been created by the "Electronic Billing" process for 837 Professional files.
Steps
- Using the preferred method of viewing SQL tables, validate SYSTEM.billing_837_p_report is no longer an SQL view, and is now a table.
|
Topics
• 837 Dental
• 837 Institutional
• 837 Professional
|
Future Functionality
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- HL7 Connection Monitor
- Delete Last Movement
Scenario 1: Admitting a client into a pre-admit program, upgrading to an inpatient program and delete last movement
Specific Setup:
- A generic ADT Outbound connection must exist. (ADT-TEST)
- An ADT-RXCONNECT Outbound connection must exist.
- An ADT Outbound connection must exist with a 'Connection Profile' of MATRIXCARE. This can be done via an Avatar HL7 Customization Pack that can be requested via your Netsmart Representative. (ADT-MATRIXCARE)
- The ‘Avatar PM->Client Management->Movement Options->->->Allow Admission To File/Edit Pre-Admits’ registry setting must be set to "Y".
- The 'Avatar PM->System Maintenance->Client Maintenance->->->Revert To Pre-Admit When Deleting Admission Movement’ registry setting must be set to "Y".
- Please log out of the application and log back in after completing the above configuration.
Steps
- Access the 'Admission' form.
- Enter a 'Last Name', 'First Name', select a 'Sex', enter a 'Social Security #' and a 'Date of Birth' and click [Search] and [New Client].
- Validate an 'Auto Assign ID Number' message is displayed and click [Yes].
- Set the 'Preadmit/Admission Date' of "01/01/2024", a 'Preadmit/Admit Time' of "09:00 AM", populate the 'Demographics' information, and populate all remaining required fields and click [Submit].
- Access the 'HL7 Connection Monitor' form.
- Select the "ADT-RXCONNECT" Outbound connection in the 'Select Row' field.
- Validate the 'Last Message Processed' field contains an 'A05' event that contains a 'PID-3'segment which is the PATID with leading zero's and a 'PV1-44' segment of "202401010900".
- Select the "ADT-TEST" Outbound connection in the 'Select Row' field.
- Validate the 'Last Message Processed' field contains an 'A05' event that contains 'PID-3' segment which is the PATID with leading zero's and a 'PV1-44' segment of "202401010900".
- Validate there is no new message for "ADT-MATRIXCARE".
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Admission' form for the client selected.
- Select the existing row in the pre-display and click [Edit].
- Change the 'Preadmit/Admission Date' to "02/10/2024", a 'Preadmit/Admit Time' to "01:00 PM".
- Change the 'Program' field to an Inpatient program.
- Populate all required fields.
- Click the 'Inpatient/Partial/Day Treatment' section and populate all required fields and click [Submit].
- Access the 'HL7 Connection Monitor' form.
- Select the "ADT-RXCONNECT" Outbound connection in the 'Select Row' field.
- Validate the 'Last Message Processed' field contains an 'A08' event that contains a 'PID-3' segment which is the PATID with leading zero's and a 'PV1-44' segment of "202402101300".
- Select the "ADT-TEST" Outbound connection in the 'Select Row' field.
- Validate the 'Last Message Processed' field contains an 'A08' event that contains a 'PID-3' segment which is the PATID with leading zero's and a 'PV1-44' segment of "202402101300".
- Select the "ADT-MATRIXCARE" Outbound connection in the 'Select Row' field.
- Validate the 'Last Message Processed' field contains an 'A01' event with an 'MSH-4' segment of "98", a 'PID-3' segment of the PATID with no leading zeros, and a 'PV1-44' segment that contains "202402101300".
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Delete Last Movement' form.
- Validate a message is displayed stating "Deletion of any movement will remove the client from any bed they may be in. If a client needs to be in a bed, it needs to be entered via Unit/Room/Bed Assignment." and click [OK].
- Select "Episode #1" in the 'Episode Number' field.
- Validate the 'Client Information' field contains the information for the admission program and click [Submit].
- Validate a message is displayed stating " You are about to delete an Admission movement for episode 1. Deleting this movement will revert the episode to the Pre-Admit status. Do you want to continue?" and click [Yes].
- Access the 'HL7 Connection Monitor' form.
- Select the "ADT-RXCONNECT" Outbound connection in the 'Select Row' field.
- Validate the 'Last Message Processed' field contains an 'A08' event that contains a 'PID-3' segment which is the PATID with leading zero's and a 'PV1-44' segment of "202401010900".
- Select the "ADT-TEST" Outbound connection in the 'Select Row' field.
- Validate the 'Last Message Processed' field contains an 'A08' event that contains a 'PID-3' segment which is the PATID with leading zero's and a 'PV1-44' segment of "202401010900".
- Select the "ADT-MATRIXCARE" Outbound connection in the 'Select Row' field.
- Validate the 'Last Message Processed' field contains an 'A11' event with a 'PID-3' segment of the PATID with no leading zeros, and a 'PV1-44' segment that contains "202402101300".
- Close the form.
|
Topics
• HL7
• HL7 Connection Monitor
|
'Detail of Visits By Client and Program' report
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Detail of Visits By Client and Program
Scenario 1: Detail of Visits By Client and Program - validate report
Steps
- Access the 'Detail of Visits By Client and Program' form.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Include Services From' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Include Services Through' field.
- Select the desired value(s) in the 'Select The Program To Be Included' field.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the 'Detail of Visits By Client and Program' report is displayed and contains the expected data based on the dates/program(s) selected.
- Close the report and the form.
Scenario 2: Detail of Visits By Client and Program - validate report
Steps
- Access the 'Detail of Visits By Client and Program' form.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Include Services From' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Include Services Through' field.
- Select the desired value(s) in the 'Select The Program To Be Included' field.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the 'Detail of Visits By Client and Program' report is displayed and contains the expected data based on the dates/program(s) selected.
- Close the report and the form.
|
Topics
• Detail of Visits By Client and Program
|
Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Service Fee
- Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance
- Service Fee/Cross Reference and Guarantor Definition Export
Scenario 1: File Import - 'Service Fee/Cross Reference' and 'Service Guarantor Definitions' file type(s).
Specific Setup:
- An existing service code is identified, or a new one is created. Note the service code.
- Service code 1.
- An existing financial class is identified. Note the financial class.
- Financial Class 1.
- File Import:
- Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance:
- File 1: Is created for 'Service code 1' with 'From Date' and contains a value with the below conditions for the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered'.
- Only having alphanumeric characters.
- More than 18 characters in length.
- File 2: Is created for 'Service code 1' with 'From Date' and contains a value with the below conditions for the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered'.
- Having 1-8 characters.
- Having non-alphanumeric characters (blank spaces, symbols, etc.).
- File 3: Is created for 'Service code 1' with 'From Date' and contains a value with the below conditions for the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered'.
- Having only 1-8 alphanumeric characters.
- Not having characters like - (blank spaces, symbols, etc.).
- Service Guarantor Definition:
- File 4: Is created for 'Service code 1' and 'Financial Class 1' with 'From Date' that contains a value with the below conditions for the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered'.
- Only having alphanumeric characters.
- More than 18 characters in length.
- File 5: Is created for 'Service code 1' and 'Financial Class 1' with 'From Date' that contains a value with the below conditions for the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered'.
- Having 1-8 characters.
- Having non-alphanumeric characters (blank spaces, symbols, etc.).
- File 6: Is created for 'Service code 1' and 'Financial Class 1' with 'From Date' that contains a value with the below conditions for the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered'.
- Having only 1-8 alphanumeric characters.
- Not having characters like - (blank spaces, symbols, etc.).
Steps
Scenario 2: Service Fee/Cross Reference Definition - Guarantor Definition - Form and Report - field validations
Specific Setup:
- An existing service code is identified, or a new one is created. Note the service code.
- Service code 1.
- Service Fee/Cross Reference Definition:
- Has an existing 'Service Fee/Cross Reference Definition'. (note the 'From Date')
- The 'County Where Service is Rendered' field does not have any value.
- Guarantor Definition:
- Does not have any existing 'Guarantor Definition'.
- Service code 2.
- Has an existing 'Service Fee/Cross Reference Definition'. (note the 'From Date')
- The 'County Where Service is Rendered' field does not have any value.
Steps
- Open the 'Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance' form.
- Verify that the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered' is displayed.
- Initially this field will be empty.
- This field will be enabled and not required.
- Select the 'Enter New' option.
- This field will be empty.
- This field will be enabled and not required.
- Select the 'Edit Existing' option.
- Validate that the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered' is displayed.
- This field will be disabled now.
- Search and select 'Service code 1' in the 'Service Code' field.
- Enter the appropriate date value in the 'From Date' field for 'Service code 1' noted in the setup.
- Click [Select Fee/Cross Ref To Edit/Default From Existing Row].
- Select the appropriate record from the list.
- Click [OK].
- Validate that the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered' is displayed.
- This field will be empty.
- This field will be enabled and not required.
- Try to enter any desired value that is more than 18 characters in length in the field 'County Where Service is Rendered'.
- Verify that the field is restricted only to accept 18 characters.
- Enter any desired value in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field that satisfies the following conditions,
- The total character length will be 1 - 18.
- Will have characters other than alphanumeric (Blank spaces).
- Tab out from the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field.
- Verify that the error message displayed: "Invalid entry. Please enter 1-18 alphanumeric characters."
- Click [OK].
- Select the 'Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance' item.
- Validate that the value is cleared in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field.
- Enter any desired value in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field that satisfies the following conditions,
- The total character length will be 1 - 18.
- Will have characters other than alphanumeric (special characters, symbols, etc.).
- Tab out from the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field.
- Verify that the error message displayed: "Invalid entry. Please enter 1-18 alphanumeric characters."
- Click [OK].
- Select the 'Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance' item.
- Validate that the value is cleared in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field.
- Enter any desired value in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field that satisfies the following conditions,
- The total character length will be 1 - 18.
- Will have only the alphanumeric characters (without blank spaces, special characters, symbols, etc.).
- Tab out from the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Yes].
- Validate that the value is cleared in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field and disabled.
- Select the 'Edit Existing' option.
- Search and select 'Service code 2' in the 'Service Code' field.
- Enter the appropriate date value in the 'From Date' field for 'Service code 2' noted in the setup.
- Click [Select Fee/Cross Ref To Edit/Default From Existing Row].
- Select the appropriate record from the list.
- Click [OK].
- Validate that the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered' does not have any values in it.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Yes].
- Click [Service Fee/Cross Reference Definition Report].
- Select 'Service code 1' in the group tree.
- Click the 'Service Code Cross References' link.
- Verify that the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered' is displayed with the value.
- Navigate back to the 'Main report' tab.
- Select 'Service code 2' in the group tree.
- Click the 'Service Code Cross References' link.
- Verify that the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered' is not displayed when there is no value filed.
- Click [Close Report].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open the 'Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance' form.
- Select the 'Guarantor Definitions' item.
- Verify that the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered' is displayed.
- Initially this field will be empty.
- This field will be enabled and not required.
- Select the 'Edit Existing' option.
- Validate that the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered' is displayed.
- This field will be disabled now.
- Select the 'Enter New' option.
- This field will be empty.
- This field will be enabled and not required.
- Search and select 'Service code 1' in the 'Service Code' field.
- Enter any desired date value in the 'From Date' field.
- Enter any desired values in all the required fields.
- Validate that the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered' is displayed.
- This field will be empty.
- This field will be enabled and not required.
- Try to enter any desired value that is more than 18 characters in length in the field 'County Where Service is Rendered'.
- Verify that the field is restricted only to accept 18 characters.
- Enter any desired value in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field that satisfies the following conditions,
- The total character length will be 1 - 18.
- Will have characters other than alphanumeric (Blank spaces).
- Tab out from the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field.
- Verify that the error message displayed: "Invalid entry. Please enter 1-18 alphanumeric characters."
- Click [OK].
- Validate that the value is cleared in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field.
- Enter any desired value in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field that satisfies the following conditions,
- The total character length will be 1 - 18.
- Will have characters other than alphanumeric (special characters, symbols, etc.).
- Tab out from the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field.
- Verify that the error message displayed: "Invalid entry. Please enter 1-18 alphanumeric characters."
- Click [OK].
- Validate that the value is cleared in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field.
- Enter any desired value in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field that satisfies the following conditions,
- The total character length will be 1 - 18.
- Will have only the alphanumeric characters (without blank spaces, special characters, symbols, etc.).
- Tab out from the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Yes].
- Validate that the value is cleared in the 'County Where Service is Rendered' field and disabled.
- Select the 'Edit Existing' option.
- Search and select 'Service code1' in the 'Service Code' field.
- Enter the date that is used in step 2(g) in the 'From Date' field.
- Click [Select Definition To Edit/Default From Existing Row].
- Select the appropriate record from the list.
- Click [OK].
- Validate that the new field 'County Where Service is Rendered' has the value filed in step 2(v).
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
Scenario 3: Validate 'Service Fee/Cross Reference and Guarantor Definition Export'
Specific Setup:
- An existing service code is identified or a new one is created. Note the service code.
- Service code 1.
- Service Fee/Cross Reference Definition:
- Has an existing 'Service Fee/Cross Reference Definition'.
- Note the value in 'From Date'.
- The 'County Where Service is Rendered' field contains a valid value.
- Note the value in 'County Where Service is Rendered'.
- Note any other desired values.
- Guarantor Definition:
- Has an existing 'Guarantor Definition'.
- Note the value in 'From Date'.
- The 'County Where Service is Rendered' field contains a valid value.
- Note the value in 'County Where Service is Rendered'.
- Note any other desired values.
- Service code 2.
- Service Fee/Cross Reference Definition:
- Has an existing 'Service Fee/Cross Reference Definition'.
- Note the value in 'From Date'.
- The 'County Where Service is Rendered' field does not contain any value.
- Note any other desired values.
- Guarantor Definition:
- Has an existing 'Guarantor Definition'.
- Note the value in 'From Date'.
- The 'County Where Service is Rendered' field does not contain any value.
- Note any other desired values.
Steps
Note: The crystal report contains all fields available for export, and therefore is not intended to be readable. Process the export to read the data. - Open 'Service Fee/Cross Reference and Guarantor Definition Export'.
- Select 'Guarantor Definition' in the 'Record Type(s) to Export' field.
- Verify that the 'Export to Crystal Report' is enabled.
- Verify that the 'Export Service Fee/Cross Reference to File' is disabled.
- Verify that the 'Export Guarantor Definition to File' is enabled.
- Click [Export to Crystal Report].
- Verify that there are two options as below:
- Service Fee/Cross Reference Export.
- Guarantor Definition Export.
- Click the 'Service Fee/Cross Reference Export' link.
- Verify that the report shows "No Data Found For Report".
- Return to the 'Main Report'.
- Click the 'Guarantor Definition Export' link.
- Validate that the report is displaying the value for the field 'County Where Service is Rendered', for 'Service code 1'.
- Validate that there is no value displayed for the field 'County Where Service is Rendered' for 'Service code 2'.
- Click [Close Report].
- Click [Export Guarantor Definition to File].
- Verify that the exported .txt file is stored locally.
- Verify that the file contains 'Service Code 1', 'From Date', and the 'County Where Service is Rendered' values.
- Close the file and return to the form.
- Uncheck 'Guarantor Definition' in the 'Record Type(s) to Export' field.
- Verify that the 'Export to Crystal Report' is disabled.
- Verify that the 'Export Service Fee/Cross Reference to File' is disabled.
- Verify that the 'Export Guarantor Definition to File' is disabled.
- Select 'Service Fee/Cross Reference' in the 'Record Type(s) to Export' field.
- Verify that the 'Export to Crystal Report' is enabled.
- Verify that the 'Export Service Fee/Cross Reference to File' is enabled.
- Verify that the 'Export Guarantor Definition to File' is disabled.
- Click [Export to Crystal Report].
- Verify that there are two options as below:
- Service Fee/Cross Reference Export.
- Guarantor Definition Export.
- Click the 'Guarantor Definition Export' link.
- Verify that the report shows "No Data Found For Report".
- Return to the 'Main Report'.
- Click the 'Service Fee/Cross Reference Export' link.
- Validate that the report is displaying the value for the field 'County Where Service is Rendered', for 'Service code 1'.
- Validate that there is no value displayed for the field 'County Where Service is Rendered' for 'Service code 2'.
- Click [Close Report].
- Click [Export Service Fee/Cross Reference to File].
- Verify that the exported .txt file is stored locally.
- Verify that the file contains 'Service Code 1', 'From Date', and the 'County Where Service is Rendered' values.
- Close the file and return to the form.
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
Electronic Billing - 837 Institutional
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance
- Electronic Billing
Scenario 1: Electronic Billing - 837I with and without 'County Where Service is Rendered' field value.
|
Topics
• Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance
• File Import
• Claim Follow-up
• Service Fee/Cross Reference and Guarantor Definition Export
• Electronic Billing
• 837 Institutional
|
Guardiant - metric processing
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Guardiant
- Guardiant Application - Analytics
Scenario 1: Guardiant Metric Processing/Data - Validations (Avatar PM)
Specific Setup:
- Have a system configured for "Guardiant" reporting
- Logged in user has access to the "Guardiant" form in Avatar and the "Guardiant" application
Steps
- Open form "Guardiant"
- Click [Test Daily Collection]
- Validate message "Test Succeeded" is displayed
- Click [Yes] to the warning message
- Validate message "Test Succeeded" is displayed
- Click [Test Metrics Collection]
- Validate message "Test Succeeded" is displayed
- Click [Yes] to the warning message
- Validate message "Test Succeeded" is displayed
- Log into "Guardiant"
- At the "Client Search", select the desired client account number
- Click "Analytics" from the menu on the right side panel
- Click the "Finance" tab at the top of the page
- Navigate to the "PM Total Payments" metric graph
- Hover over the current date and a previous date on the graph
- Validate the values displayed, are as expected
- Navigate to the "PM Total Charges" metric graph
- Hover over the current date and a previous date on the graph
- Validate the values displayed, are as expected
- Navigate to the "# of 835 Files Posted" metric graph
- Hover over the current date and a previous date on the graph
- Validate the values displayed, are as expected
- Navigate to the "# of 837 Files Posted" metric graph
- Hover over the current date and a previous date on the graph
- Validate the values displayed, are as expected
- Navigate to the "Number of Claim Follow-Ups Created" metric graph
- Hover over the current date and a previous date on the graph
- Validate the values displayed, are as expected
- Navigate to the "Number of Claim Follow-Up Notes Created" metric graph
- Hover over the current date and a previous date on the graph
- Validate the values displayed, are as expected
- Navigate to the "Number of Records in AR Auto Batch" metric graph
- Hover over the current date and a previous date on the graph
- Validate the values displayed, are as expected
- Click the "Clinical" tab at the top of the page
- Navigate to the "Clinical Metrics" metric graph
- Hover over the current date and a previous date on the graph
- Validate the values displayed, are as expected
- Navigate to the "Services by Week" metric graph
- Hover over the current date and a previous date on the graph
- Validate the values displayed, are as expected
|
Topics
• Forms
|
Edit Service Information
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Client Charge Input
- Edit Service Information (Charge Fee Access)
Scenario 1: Edit Service Information – Change the Service Code.
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set 'Enable California Billing' Registry Setting Value to 'Y'.
- Set 'End Date California Billing' Registry Setting Value to a future date, allowing ample time for testing.
- Client
- An existing client or newly admitted client is used, where Client ID is noted.
Steps
- Open "Client Charge Input" form.
- Enter any value in 'Date of Service'.
- Enter the 'Client ID' created in the setup.
- Select desired value in 'Episode Number'.
- Enter group service code in 'Service Code'.
- Validate the message 'Enter The Number Of Clients In The Group' is received.
- Click [Cancel].
- Validate the message 'You Must Enter The Number Of Clients In The Group For Group Services' is received.
- Click[OK].
- Enter any code other than group code in 'Service Code'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open "Client Ledger" form.
- Enter the 'Client ID' created in the setup.
- Click [All Episodes] in 'Claim/Episode/All Episodes'.
- Click [Simple] in 'Ledger Type'.
- Click[Process].
- Validate the services are filled with correct service code entered in previous steps in the report.
- Click [X].
- Close the form.
- Open the "Edit Service Information" form.
- Enter the Client ID created in the setup.
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Select any service from the grid.
- Click [OK].
- Repeat Steps 5-21.
- Open "Edit Service Information (Charge Fee Access)" form.
- Repeat Steps 22-27.
|
Topics
• Edit Service Information
|
'Service Codes' form
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: Service Codes - Add/Edit a Service Code
Steps
- Access the 'Service Codes' form.
- Select "Add" in the 'Add New or Edit Existing' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'New Service Code' field.
- Enter any value with an equal sign in the 'Service Code Definition' field.
- Validate a message is displayed stating: Service Code Definition cannot contain an equal sign.
- Click [OK].
- Enter the desired value in the 'Service Code Definition' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Service Required By' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Type Of Service' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Type Of Fee' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Group Code' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Insurance Charge Category' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Is This A Balance Forward Service Code' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Does This Code Have a Professional Component' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Is This Service a Visit?' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Is This Service An Intervention?' field.
- Populate any other required and desired fields.
- Click [Submit] and [Yes].
- Select "Edit" in the 'Add New Or Edit Existing' field.
- Select the service code added in the previous steps in the 'Service Code' field.
- Validate all previously filed data is displayed.
- Close the form.
Client Merge - 'Target Client'
Scenario 1: Client Merge - Merge client
Specific Setup:
- Two clients are enrolled in existing episodes (Client A & Client B).
- "Client A" must have existing services on file for "Episode 1".
Steps
- Access the 'Client Merge' form.
- Select "Client A" in the 'Source Client' field.
- Select "Client B" in the 'Target Client' field.
- Select "Episode 1" in the 'Source Client Episode' field.
- Validate "Client B" remains selected in the 'Target Client' field.
- Select "Yes" in the 'Create New Episode On Merge' field.
- Click [File].
- Validate a 'Do you wish to continue with the indicated action?' message is displayed.
- Click [Yes].
- Validate a message stating 'The following new episode has been created for the target client indicated. Episode 2' is displayed.
- Click [OK] and close the form.
- Access the 'Client Ledger' form.
- Select "Client B" in the 'Client ID' field.
- Select "All Episodes" in the 'Claim/Episode/All Episodes' field.
- Select "Simple" in the 'Ledger Type' field.
- Select "Yes" in the 'Include Zero Charges' field.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the service merged from "Client A" is displayed.
- Close the report and the form.
|
Topics
• Service Codes
• Client Merge
|
Practitioner Enrollment Form - Database Validation
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Practitioner Enrollment
- Practitioner Termination
- Performing Provider Registration
Scenario 1: Practitioner Enrollment Form - Validate SYSTEM.staff_enrollment_history for PERFID and PPIUNIQUEID
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- 'Enable Practitioners link to Performing Providers' ='Y'.
- Practitioner Enrollment:
- A new Practitioner is enrolled, or an existing Practitioner is chosen - Note Registration Date, Practitioner ID.
Steps
- Open "Practitioner Enrollment" form.
- Enter desired 'Staff' in 'Select Staff'.
- Click [New Staff].
- Click [Yes].
- Enter the desired 'Staff Name' in 'Name'.
- Enter any value in 'Date of Birth'.
- Enter any value in 'Registration Date'.
- Enter any value in 'Office Address - Zip Code'.
- Enter any value in 'Office Telephone (1) '.
- Click [Categories/Taxonomy].
- Select desired value from 'Category/Taxonomy'.
- Enter desired value in 'Effective Date'.
- Select desired value in 'Practitioner Category'.
- Select desired value in 'Discipline'.
- Select desired value in 'Practitioner Categories For Coverage'.
- Click [Add Practitioner Categories].
- Validate dialog: 'Saved. Please note: The changes will take effect when you submit the form'.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Practitioner Enrollment].
- Click [Submit].
- Open "Performing Provider Registration" form.
- Enter the 'Staff Name' enrolled above in 'Select Performing Provider'.
- Click the 'Staff Name'.
- Verify 'Performing Provider's Name' is the name of 'Staff' enrolled above.
- Verify 'Registration Start Date' is same 'Registration Date' of the 'Staff'.
- Verify 'Primary License Type for Claim' is same as the 'Practitioner Category' of the 'Staff'.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate form return dialog.
- Click [No].
- Open any SQL Database.
- Query the Following : 'Select * from SYSTEM.staff_enrollment_history table';.
- Verify 'Staff' details are populated.
- Verify 'PERFID' column is populated with desired value.
- Verify 'PPIUniqueID' column is populated with desired value.
- Close the Query.
- Open "Practitioner Termination" form.
- Enter the 'Staff ID'.
- Enter any valid date in 'Termination Date'.
- Select any valid reason from 'Reason For Termination'.
- Click [Submit].
- Open "Performing Provider Registration" form.
- Enter the 'Staff Name' enrolled above in 'Select Performing Provider'.
- Click the 'Staff Name'.
- Verify 'Performing Provider's Name' is the name of 'Staff' enrolled above.
- Verify 'Registration Start Date' is same 'Registration Date' of the 'Staff'.
- Verify 'Registration End Date' is same 'Termination Date' of the 'Staff'.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate form return dialog.
- Click [No].
File Import - Posting/Adjustment Posting'
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Posting/Adjustment Codes Definition
- Create Interim Billing Batch File
- Electronic Billing
- Payment Acknowledgement
Scenario 1: File Import - Validate Payment/Adjustment import files
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Avatar PM->Billing->Remittance Processing->->->Enable Payment Acknowledgement = Y.
- Avatar PM->Billing->Remittance Processing->->->Prevent Posting Payments Unless Payment has been Acknowledged = 3, at a minimum.
- Avatar PM->System Maintenance->File Import->->->Import File Delimiter – note the value to be used when creating the file to import.
- Posting/Adjustment Codes Definition has been used to note a payment code.
- A new payment code is created or an existing payment code is edited and set to inactive. "Payment Code 1"
- An active new payment code is created or an existing payment code is chosen, "Payment Code 2".
- Admission:
- An existing client is identified or new client is admitted. Note Client ID.
- Financial Eligibility:
- Client created above is assigned a guarantor. Note Guarantor ID.
- Client Charge Input:
- Services are rendered to the client. Service date and service code assigned is noted.
- File Import :
- Create an import "File A" to add inactive payment code (Payment Code 1).
- Create an import "File B" to add active payment code (Payment Code 2).
- Create an import "File C" to add inactive Adjustment code (Adjustment Code 1).
- Create an import "File D" to add active Adjustment code (Adjustment Code 2).
Steps
- Open the "File Import" form.
- Select the 'Payment/Adjustment Posting' in the 'File Type' field.
- Click [Upload New File] in 'Action'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select 'File A'.
- Click [Compile/Validate File] in 'Action'.
- Select 'File A' in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate a message displays: 'File A contains one or more errors. These errors can be reviewed using 'Print Errors' action'.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Print Errors] in 'Action'.
- Select 'File A' in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the contents of the file, and the 'Posting code is inactive' error message.
- Click [Close Report].
- Click [Delete File] in 'Action'.
- Select 'File A' in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Click [Yes] in 'Delete File' dialog.
- Validate the dialog: 'Deleted'.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Upload New File] in the 'Action'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select 'File B'.in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Compile/Validate File] in the 'Action'.
- Select 'File B' in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the message : 'Compiled'.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Print File] in 'Action'.
- Select 'File B' in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the contents of the report.
- Click [Close Report].
- Select 'Post File' in the 'Action'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select 'File B' in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Validate a message displays: Posted.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Open "Client Ledger" form.
- Enter the 'Client ID'.
- Click [Episode] in 'Claim/Episode/All Episodes'.
- Select the desired 'Episode #' form 'Episode'.
- Click [Simple] in 'Ledger Type'.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the imported activity in the report data.
- Click [X].
- Click [No] in the 'Form Return' dialog.
- Repeat 1-51,using "File C".
- Repeat 1-51,using "File D".
|
Topics
• Practitioner
• File Import
|
'Services by Program and Age Group' report
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Services By Program and Age Group
Scenario 1: Services By Program and Age Group - Validate report
Specific Setup:
- Multiple clients defined with different ages.
- Multiple services on file for clients.
Steps
- Access the 'Services by Program and Age Group' form.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Include Services From' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Include Services Through' field.
- Select the desired program(s) in the 'Select Programs To Be Included' field.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the 'Services By Program & Age Group' report is displayed.
- Validate the report contains the services for the defined date range as expected.
- Close the report and the form.
|
Topics
• Report Viewer
|
Retroactive Payor Change
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Client Charge Input
- Retroactive Payor Change
- Service Codes
Scenario 1: RETROACTIVE PAYOR CHANGE - Compile Individual Client
Specific Setup:
- Admit a Client in Out Patient Program. Note Client ID Program and Admission Date.
- Financial Eligibility
- 99999 NTST Default Guarantor acts as the Primary Guarantor.
Steps
- Open the "Admission(Out Patient)" form.
- Set any value to 'Last Name', 'First Name' and
- Select any value from the 'Sex' dropdown list.
- Click [Search] button.
- Set any value in 'Social Security Number'
- Click [Search] button.
- Click [New Client] button.
- Validate the Client dialog contains “Client No Yes Auto Assign Next ID Number?”.
- Set any value in 'Date Of Birth'
- Set any value in 'Pre admit/Admission Date'.
- Select any value from the 'Program' dropdown list
- Select any value from the 'Type Of Admission' dropdown list.
- Set any value in the 'Client’s Address - Street'.
- Set any value in 'Zip Code'.
- Select any value from the 'Client Race' dropdown list,
- Select any value from the 'Ethnic Origin' dropdown list.
- Select any value from the 'Religion' dropdown list.
- Click [Submit] button.
- Open "Client Charge Input" form.
- Set any value in 'Date Of Service'.
- Set the 'Client ID' created above.
- Set any value in 'Service Code'.
- Set any value in 'Practitioner'
- Click [Submit]
- Validate the Form Return dialog.
- Open the "Close Charges" form.
- Select the [Close Charges] in 'Liability Update Or Close Charges' radio button.
- Set any value in 'Thru Date'.
- Click [Individual] in 'Individual, All, Or Interim Batch Cycle' radio button.
- Set the 'Client ID' created above.
- Select any episode from the 'Episode Number' dropdown list.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate the Form Return dialog.
- Open the "Client Ledger" form.
- Set the 'Client ID' created above.
- Click [All Episodes] in 'Claim/Episode/All Episodes' radio button.
- Click [Simple] in 'Ledger Type' radio button.
- Click [Process] button.
- Validate in the CLIENT LEDGER to ensure allocation of charges to the 99999 NTST Default Payor.
- Click the Client Ledger [X] link.
- Validate the Form Return dialog.
- Open the "Retroactive Payor Change" form.
- Set any value in 'From Date'.
- Set any value in 'To Date'.
- Click [Compile] in 'Compile Or Post' radio button
- Click [No] in 'Compile Interim Billing Batch?' radio button.
- Click [Individual] in 'Compile Individual or All Clients' radio button.
- Set the 'Client ID' to created above.
- Click [Non-Recoverable object] in 'Financial Classes To Transfer Liability From *'.
- Click [NTST Default Payor (99999)] in 'Guarantors To Transfer Liability From'
- Click [Submit].
- Validate the Retroactive Payor Change dialog.
- Click [Yes] button.
- Click [Review Previously Compiled Information] button.
- Validate the Crystal Report page to ensure allocation of charges to the 99999 NTST Default Payor.
- Click [Close Report] button.
- Click[Submit] button.
- Click [Discard] button.
- Validate Confirm Close dialog.
- Click [Yes] button.
- Open "Retroactive Payor Change" form.
- Click [Post] in 'Compile Or Post' radio button.
- Select any value from the 'Transfer Code' drop down list.
- Select any value from the 'Payor To Assign' drop down list.
- Click [Y] in the 'Date Of Receipt'
- Click [T] in the 'Posting Date'.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate the Retroactive Payor Change dialog.
- Confirm the reassignment of liabilities.
- Validate the records assigned and total amount assigned.
- Return to the form.
- Click the [Review Previously Compiled Information] button.
- Click [Close Report] button.
- Click [Discard] button
- Validate the message 'confirm closing without saving'.
- Click [Yes].
- Open the "Client Ledger" form.
- Set the 'Client ID' created above.
- Click the [All Episodes] in 'Claim/Episode/All Episodes' radio button.
- Click the [Simple] in 'Ledger Type' radio button.
- Click the [Process] button.
- Validate the CLIENT LEDGER to ensure allocation of charges to the Guarantor selected above in the "Retroactive Payor Change" form.
- Click the Client Ledger [X] link.
- Validate the Form Return dialog.
Scenario 2: RETROACTIVE PAYOR CHANGE - Compile All Clients
Specific Setup:
- Admit a Client in Out Patient/ In Patient Program. Note Client ID Program and Admission Date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- 99999 NTST Default Guarantor acts as the Primary Guarantor.
Steps
- Open the "Admission(Out Patient)" form.
- Set any value to 'Last Name', 'First Name'
- Select any value from the 'Sex' dropdown list.
- Click the [Search] button.
- Set any value in 'Social Security Number'.
- Click the [Search] button.
- Click the [New Client].
- Validate the Client dialog contains “Client No Yes Auto Assign Next ID Number?”.
- Set any value in 'Date Of Birth'.
- Set any value in 'Pre admit/Admission Date'.
- Select any value from the 'Program' dropdown list
- Select any value from the 'Type Of Admission' dropdown list.
- Set any value in the 'Client’s Address - Street'.
- Set any value in 'Zip Code'.
- Select any value from the 'Client Race' dropdown list,
- Select any value from the 'Ethnic Origin' dropdown list.
- Select any value from the 'Religion' dropdown list.
- Click [Submit] button.
- Open "Client Charge Input" form.
- Set any value in 'Date Of Service'.
- Set the 'Client ID' created above.
- Set any value in 'Service Code'.
- Set any value in 'Practitioner'.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate the Form Return dialog.
- Open the "Close Charges" form.
- Select the [Close Charges] in 'Liability Update Or Close Charges' radio button.
- Set any value in 'Thru Date'.
- Click the [Individual] in 'Individual, All, Or Interim Batch Cycle' radio button.
- Set the 'Client ID' created above.
- Select any episode from the 'Episode Number' dropdown list.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate the Form Return dialog.
- Open the "Client Ledger" form.
- Set the 'Client ID' created above.
- Click the [All Episodes] in 'Claim/Episode/All Episodes' radio button.
- Click the [Simple] in 'Ledger Type' radio button.
- Click the [Process] button.
- Validate in the CLIENT LEDGER to ensure allocation of charges to the 99999 NTST Default Payor.
- Click the Client Ledger [X] link.
- Validate the Form Return dialog.
- Open the "Retroactive Payor Change" form.
- Set any value in 'From Date'.
- Set any value in 'To Date'.
- Click [Compile] in 'Compile Or Post' radio button
- Click [No] in 'Compile Interim Billing Batch?' radio button.
- Click [All Clients] in 'Compile Individual or All Clients' radio button.
- Click [Non-Recoverable object] in 'Financial Classes To Transfer Liability From *'.
- Click [NTST Default Payor (99999)] in 'Guarantors To Transfer Liability From'
- Click [Submit].
- Validate the Retroactive Payor Change dialog.
- Click [Yes] button.
- Click the [Review Previously Compiled Information] button.
- Validate the Crystal Report page to ensure allocation of charges to the 99999 NTST Default Payor.
- Click [Close Report] button.
- Click [Submit] button.
- Click [Discard] button.
- Validate Confirm Close dialog.
- Click [Yes] button.
- Open "Retroactive Payor Change" form.
- Click [Post] in 'Compile Or Post' radio button.
- Select any value from the 'Transfer Code' drop down list.
- Select any value from the 'Payor To Assign' drop down list.
- Click [Y] in the 'Date Of Receipt'
- Click [T] in the 'Posting Date'.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate the Retroactive Payor Change dialog.
- Confirm the reassignment of liabilities.
- Validate the records assigned and total amount assigned.
- Return to the form.
- Click the [Review Previously Compiled Information] button.
- Click the [Close Report] button.
- Click the [Discard] button
- Validate the message 'confirm closing without saving'.
- Click [Yes].
- Open the "Client Ledger" form.
- Set the 'Client ID' created above.
- Click [All Episodes] in 'Claim/Episode/All Episodes' radio button.
- Click [Simple] in 'Ledger Type' radio button.
- Click [Process] button.
- Validate the CLIENT LEDGER to ensure allocation of charges to the Guarantor selected above in the "Retroactive Payor Change" form.
- Click the Client Ledger [X] link.
- Validate the Form Return dialog.
|
Topics
• Retroactive Payor Change
|
Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Service Codes
- Roll-Up Services Definition
- Client Charge Input
- Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist
Scenario 1: Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist - Post Roll-Up Worklist - Validate Client Ledger
Specific Setup:
- Service Codes:
- Roll-Up service is identified. Note the service code
- Roll-Up component service code(s) are identified. Note the service code(s).
- Roll-Up Services Definition exists with the desired values:
- 'Roll-Up Service' contains the Roll-Up service code identified above.
- 'Component Service' contains the Roll-Up component service code(s) identified above.
- Client 1:
- Client is identified that will be given Roll-Up component service code(s), using one of the client charge input options. Note the service dates.
- Client Ledger is used to verify that the component services were created successfully.
Steps
- Open the 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist' form.
- Enter/Select the 'From Date' that includes services start date.
- Enter/Select the 'Through Date' which includes services end date.
- Select the 'Roll-Up Definition' noted in Setup.
- Select desired value in 'Exclude Component Services From Report'.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Verify the worklist compiles successfully.
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify the Roll-Up Services Worklist includes the correct services rendered on or after from date and on or before through date.
- Click the [Post Roll-Up Services Worklist].
- Select the compiled worklist in 'Through Date'.
- Select desired value in 'Default Write Off Posting Code'
- Click [Post Worklist].
- Verify 'Post Complete' information message.
- Close the form.
- Open the 'Client Ledger' form for the desired client.
- Process the report for the desired date range.
- Verify the Roll-Up services & component are posted correctly.
- Close the report and the form.
|
Topics
• Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-up Services Worklist
|
Edit Service Information
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Registry Settings (CWS)
- Edit Service Information (Charge Fee Access)
- Create Interim Billing Batch File
- Electronic Billing
Scenario 1: Edit Service Information
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set the "Enable Alternative Service Location Fields" Registry setting to "Y".
- System is set up to allow ‘Add-On’ services to the primary services.
- Service Codes:
- Use ‘Service Code Category’ to note the ‘Primary Code’. Note the associated add-on codes.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- Guarantor 1: Note the ‘Financial Class’. This will be the client’s primary guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults:
- The ‘Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)’ = 1.
- Clients:
- Client 1:
- Is enrolled in an outpatient program. Note the program.
- Client has an active diagnosis record.
- Client has an active financial eligibility record with the above guarantor.
- Services have been provided for the above ‘Primary Code’ that include add-on codes.
- Close Charges was used to close the charges.
- Client Ledger has been used to verify that the liability distributed to the primary guarantor, and note the dates of service for closed, unclaimed services for the above service codes.
- Client 2:
- Is enrolled in an inpatient program. Note the program.
- Client has an active diagnosis record.
- Client has an active financial eligibility record with a primary guarantor.
- Services have been provided for the above ‘Primary Code’ that include add-on codes.
- Close Charges was used to close the charges.
- Client Ledger has been used to verify that the liability distributed to the primary guarantor, and note the dates of service for closed, unclaimed services for the above service codes.
Steps
- Open the 'Edit Service Information' form.
- Select 'Client 1' in ‘Client ID’.
- Select the 'Service Start Date' and 'Service End Date'.
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Select the desired service in the grid.
- Click [OK].
- Verify that the 'Facility Location' fields are not required.
- Verify that the field ‘Facility Location Code Identifier’ is a text field.
- Enter a value in one of the 'Facility Location' fields.
- Verify that the 'Facility Location' fields are now required.
- Enter desired data in the 'Facility Location' fields. Note the data.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open the SQL Querying tool and validate that the filed 'Facility Location' values for the service is stored with a unique 'JOIN_TO_TX_HISTORY' ID value in the below tables:
- "SYSTEM".billing_tx_address
- "SYSTEM".billing_claim_address
- Close the SQL query window.
- Open the 'Edit Service Information' form.
- Select 'Client 2' in ‘Client ID’.
- Select the 'Service Start Date' and 'Service End Date'.
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Select the desired service in the grid.
- Click [OK].
- Enter desired data in 'Facility Location' values similar to the above service.
- Enter desired data in the required fields.
- Select [Submit].
- Select [Yes].
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Select the desired service in the grid.
- Click [OK].
- Enter desired data in the 'Facility Location' values completely different from the Service edited above.
- Enter desired data in the required fields.
- Select [Submit].
- Select [Yes].
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Select the desired services in the grid.
- Click the [OK] button.
- Verify that the 'Facility Location' information field values are populated and displayed in the form when the 'Facility Location' fields of the services are same.
- If desired, edit one of more of the 'Facility Location' fields.
- Select [Submit].
- Select [Yes].
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Select the desired services in the grid.
- Click [OK].
- Verify that the newly updated location value is being shown.
- Open the SQL Querying tool and validate that the filed 'Facility Location' values for the service are added with the new value(s) with a unique 'JOIN_TO_TX_HISTORY' ID values in the below tables:
- "SYSTEM".billing_tx_address
- "SYSTEM".billing_claim_address
- Close the SQL query window.
- Open the 'Edit Service Information' form.
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Click [Yes].
- Select the desired services in the grid.
- Click [OK].
- Verify that the 'Facility Location' information field values are not displayed in the form when the services selected for edit have different values in the 'Facility Location 'fields.
- Enter desired data in the 'Facility Location' field(s).
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Yes].
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Click [Yes].
- Select the desired services in the grid.
- Click [OK].
- Verify that the 'Facility Location' fields are displayed in the form when the services selected for edit have the same 'Facility Location' values.
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
Scenario 2: Edit Service Information (Charge Fee Access) - Validation
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set the "Enable Alternative Service Location Fields" to "Y".
- System is set up to allow ‘Add-On’ services to the primary services.
- Service Codes:
- Use ‘Service Code Category’ to note the ‘Primary Code’. Note the associated add-on codes.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- Guarantor 1: Note the ‘Financial Class’. This will be the client’s primary guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults:
- The ‘Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)’ = 1.
- Clients:
- Client 1:
- Is enrolled in an outpatient program. Note the program.
- Client has an active diagnosis record.
- Client has an active financial eligibility record with the above guarantor.
- Services have been provided for the above ‘Primary Code’ that include add-on codes.
- Close Charges was used to close the charges.
- Client Ledger has been used to verify that the liability distributed to the primary guarantor, and note the dates of service for closed, unclaimed services for the above service codes.
- Client 2:
- Is enrolled in an inpatient program. Note the program.
- Client has an active diagnosis record.
- Client has an active financial eligibility record with a primary guarantor.
- Services have been provided for the above ‘Primary Code’ that include add-on codes.
- Close Charges was used to close the charges.
- Client Ledger has been used to verify that the liability distributed to the primary guarantor, and note the dates of service for closed, unclaimed services for the above service codes.
Steps
- Open the 'Edit Service Information(Charge Fee Access)' form.
- Select 'Client 1' in 'Client ID'.
- Select the 'Service Start Date' and 'Service End Date'.
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Select the desired service in the grid
- Click [OK].
- Verify that the 'Facility Location' fields are not required.
- Verify that the field ‘Facility Location Code Identifier’ is a text field.
- Enter a value in one of the 'Facility Location' fields.
- Verify that the 'Facility Location' fields are now required.
- Enter desired data in the 'Facility Location' fields. Note the data.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open the SQL Querying tool and validate that the filed Facility Location values for the service is stored with a unique 'JOIN_TO_TX_HISTORY' ID value in the below tables:
- "SYSTEM".billing_tx_address
- "SYSTEM".billing_claim_address
- Close the SQL query window.
- Open the 'Edit Service Information' form.
- Select 'Client 2' in 'Client ID'.
- Select the 'Service Start Date' and 'Service End Date'.
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit] button.
- Select the desired services in the grid.
- Click [OK].
- Enter desired data in 'Facility Location' values similar to the above service.
- Enter desired data in the required fields.
- Select [Submit].
- Select [Yes].
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Select the desired services in the grid
- Click [OK].
- Enter desired data in the 'Facility Location' values completely different from the Service-2.
- Enter desired data in the required fields.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Yes].
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Select the desired services in the grid.
- Click [OK].
- Verify that the 'Facility Location' information field values are populated and displayed in the form when the 'Facility Location' fields of service are same.
- If desired, edit one of more of the Facility Location fields.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Yes].
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit].
- Select the desired services in the grid
- Click [OK].
- Verify that the newly updated location value is being shown.
- Open the SQL Querying tool and validate that the filed Facility Location values for the service are added with the new value(s) with a unique 'JOIN_TO_TX_HISTORY' ID values in the below tables:
- "SYSTEM".billing_tx_address
- "SYSTEM".billing_claim_address
- Close the SQL query window.
- Return to the form.
- Click [Select Service(s) To Edit] button.
- Click [Yes].
- Select the desired services in the grid.
- Click [OK].
- Verify that the 'Facility Location' information field values are not displayed in the form when the services selected for edit have different values in the Facility Location fields.
- Enter desired data in the 'Facility Location' fields.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Yes].
- Select the desired services in the grid.
- Click [OK].
- Verify that the 'Facility Location' fields are displayed in the form when the services selected for edit have the same 'Facility Location' values.
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
Scenario 3: Filing an 837 Institutional and 837 Professional - Add on Services - Validating the service location information of parent and add on remain same
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set the "Enable Alternative Service Location Fields" Registry setting to "Y".
- System is set up to allow ‘Add-On’ services to the primary services.
- Service Codes:
- Use ‘Service Code Category’ to note the ‘Primary Code’. Note the associated add-on codes.
- Client 1:
- Is enrolled in an outpatient program. Note the program.
- Client has an active diagnosis record.
- Client has an active financial eligibility record.
- Services have been provided for the above ‘Primary Code’ that include add-on codes.
- Close Charges was used to close the charges.
- Client Ledger has been used to verify that the liability distributed to the primary guarantor, and note the dates of service for closed, unclaimed services for the above service codes.
- Client 2:
- Is enrolled in an inpatient program. Note the program.
- Client has an active diagnosis record.
- Client has an active financial eligibility record with a primary and secondary guarantor.
- Services have been provided for the above ‘Primary Code’ that include add-on codes.
- Close Charges was used to close the charges.
- Client Ledger has been used to verify that the liability distributed to the primary guarantor, and note the dates of service for closed, unclaimed services for the above service codes.
- The 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template for the guarantor and program combination has a value of '1' in '837 Institutional', 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)'.
Steps
- Open 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select '837-Institutional' in 'Billing Form'.
- Select the guarantor 'Financial Class' in 'Type' of Bill'.
- Select 'Individual' in 'Individual Or All Guarantors'.
- Select the desired 'Guarantor'.
- Select 'Inpatient' in 'Billing Type'.
- Select 'Sort File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Enter the desired 'File Description'.
- Select 'Interim Billing Batch' in 'All Clients Or Interim Billing Batch'.
- Select 'No' in 'Create Claims'.
- Enter the 'First Date of Service To Include'.
- Enter the 'Last Date of Service To Include'.
- Click [Process].
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Dump File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Select 'Print' in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the desired 'File'.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the facility defaults of primary service is displayed.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Open 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select '837-Professional' in 'Billing Form'.
- Select the guarantor 'Financial Class' in 'Type' of Bill'.
- Select 'Individual' in 'Individual Or All Guarantors'.
- Select the desired 'Guarantor'.
- Select 'Outpatient' in 'Billing Type'.
- Select 'Sort File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Enter the desired 'File Description'.
- Select 'Interim Billing Batch' in 'All Clients Or Interim Billing Batch'.
- Select 'No' in 'Create Claims'.
- Enter the 'First Date of Service To Include'.
- Enter the 'Last Date of Service To Include'.
- Click [Process].
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Dump File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Select 'Print' in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the desired 'File'.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the facility defaults of Primary and add-on service are displayed.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
|
Topics
• Edit Service Information
• 837 Professional
• 837 Institutional
|
'All Documents' widget - Diagnosis entries from user modeled forms
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Treatment Plan
- Console Widget Viewer
Scenario 1: "All Documents" Widget - Validate diagnosis records submitted via the "Diagnosis" and/or "Modeled" forms
Specific Setup:
- Have a modeled form (Form A), configured in 'Table Definition" to use the "Alias Table", "Diagnosis History (ICD10)", to file 'Diagnosis' table field data.
- A client is enrolled in an existing episode (Client A) with the following:
- A diagnosis record submitted via the 'Diagnosis' form
- A diagnosis record submitted via "Form A" with all required diagnosis alias fields populated.
- The 'All Documents' widget must be configured to a view and contains the 'Diagnosis' form, "Form A", and the 'Admission' form.
- The logged in user must have this widget accessible.
Steps
- Select "Client A" and navigate to the 'All Documents' widget.
- Select "All" in the 'Form Description' field.
- Validate the 'Diagnosis' record from the setup are displayed. Please note: any diagnosis records filed via the 'Diagnosis' form and "Form A" will display under the 'Diagnosis' form description.
- Validate the data is displayed in the 'Form Description', 'Episode (Program Name)', 'Date', 'Time', 'Data Entry By' columns as expected.
- Validate the "Form A" record from the setup are displayed.
- Validate the data is displayed in the 'Form Description', 'Episode (Program Name)', 'Date', 'Data Entry By' columns as expected.
- Validate the 'Admission' record from the setup are displayed.
- Validate the data is displayed in the 'Form Description', 'Episode (Program Name)', 'Date', 'Time', 'Data Entry By' columns as expected.
- Select any 'Diagnosis' record and click [Open].
- Validate the 'Diagnosis' form is launched as expected.
- Close the form and click [Close All].
- Select only "Diagnosis" in the 'Form Description' field.
- Validate the results include the records filed in the 'Diagnosis' form and the diagnosis record filed in "Form A".
- Validate the data is displayed in the 'Form Description', 'Episode (Program Name)', 'Date', 'Time', 'Data Entry By' columns as expected.
- Select only "Form A" in the 'Form Description' field.
- Validate the results only include diagnosis record(s) filed in "Form A".
- Validate the data is displayed in the 'Form Description', 'Episode (Program Name)', 'Date', 'Data Entry By' columns as expected.
- Select only "Admission" in the 'Form Description' field.
- Validate the results only include the 'Admission' record.
- Validate the data is displayed in the 'Form Description', 'Episode (Program Name)', 'Date', 'Time', 'Data Entry By' columns as expected.
- Select both "Diagnosis" and "Form A" in the 'Form Description' field.
- Validate the 'Form Description' column contains results for the 'Diagnosis' form and "Form A".
- Validate the 'Admission' record is not displayed.
|
Topics
• Modeling
• Diagnosis
• Widgets
|
Self Pay Payment Redistribution Process
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Service Codes
- Posting/Adjustment Codes Definition
- Client Charge Input
- Self Pay Payment Redistribution
- Registry Settings (CWS)
- Deposit Entry
Scenario 1: Self Pay Payment Redistribution includes System Financial Class of Self Pay
Specific Setup:
- Service Codes:
- Identify an existing 'prepayment' service code or create a new service code.
- Posting/Adjustment Codes Definition:
- An existing payment posting code (credit) is identified and posting code also has a reversal posting code associated to it to be used for the 'Self Pay Payment Redistribution' process.
- Select 'Yes' for the 'Include in Self Pay Redistribution Payment Process' field.
- Registry Settings:
- Set the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' : Pre Payment Service Code.
- Set the Pre Payment Service Code Registry Setting Value: Service Code identified or created above.
- Set the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' : Self Pay Payment redistribution.
- Set the 'Self Pay Payment Redistribution Posting Code' Registry Setting Value: Posting Code identified above.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- Add or identify a guarantor with the 'Self Pay' financial class.
- Add a new guarantor with the new financial class added through dictionary update given below.
- Dictionary Update:
- File - Payor
- Data Element - (1000) Financial Class
- Dictionary Code - The dictionary code for the financial class of the guarantor identified above to be used as secondary guarantor.
- Extended Dictionary Data Element - (1500) System Financial Class
- Extended Dictionary Value - Self Pay.
- Admission:
- Two new clients are admitted, or existing clients are identified. Note the client id, admission date and admission program.
- Financial Eligibility:
- Client 1:
- Assigned a Primary third party guarantor where the benefit plan includes a co-insurance amount.
- Assigned self-pay guarantor defined above (with the 'Self Pay' financial class).
- Client 2:
- Assigned a Primary third party guarantor where the benefit plan includes a co-insurance amount.
- Assigned new guarantor defined above (with the new financial class defined above that has a system financial class of self-pay).
- Client Charge Input:
- Services are rendered to the clients. Note the service date and service code.
Steps
- Open the “Registry Settings” form.
- Set the 'Limit Registry Settings' to 'Self Pay Payment Redistribution'.
- Click [Yes] in 'Include Hidden Registry Settings'.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Select 'Include Guarantors with Self Pay System Financial Class Registry Setting Value: N' item.
- Validate the message displayed : 'When set to 'Y', the 'Self Pay Payment Redistribution' process will consider guarantors that have a Financial Class value where the System Financial Class is set to Self Pay. When 'N' is selected, only text contains 'When set to 'Y', the 'Self Pay Payment Redistribution' process will consider guarantors that have a Financial Class value where the System Financial Class is set to Self Pay. When 'N' is selected, only guarantors with a base Financial Class of Self Pay will be considered during the 'Self Pay Payment Redistribution' process. This is the default behavior of the system'.
- Click [OK].
- Set the 'Registry Setting Value' to 'N'.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate the message displays: 'Include Guarantors with Self Pay System Financial Class Successful filing in 'xx'.
- Validate the form return dialog contains [Yes] [No].
- Click [No].
- Open the “Self Pay Payment Redistribution” form.
- Click [Individual] in 'All Or Individual Client'.
- Enter 'Client 1' created in setup in 'Client ID'.
- Click [Run Self Pay Payment Redistribution].
- Validates the message displays: 'The process is complete for Client 1'.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Validate that Confirm Close dialog message displays: 'Are you sure you want to close without saving? [Yes] [No].'
- Click [Yes].
- Open the "Client Ledger" form.
- Enter 'Client 1' created in setup in 'Client ID'.
- Click [All Episodes] in 'Claim/Episode/All Episodes'.
- Click [Simple] in 'Ledger Type'.
- Click [Process].
- Validate in the report if 'self pay amount paid using the service code created in setup has now been applied to each of the individual services for the self-pay guarantor and that each self-pay guarantor has a zero line balance'.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Repeat Steps 13 - 29 for 'Client 2' from setup.
- Repeat Steps 1- 12 with the 'Registry Setting Value Y'
- Repeat Steps 13-26 for 'Client 2' from setup.
- Validate in the report if 'self pay amount paid using the service code created in setup has now been applied to each of the individual services for the self-pay guarantor and that each self-pay guarantor has a zero line balance'.
- Open “Client Charge Input” form.
- Enter any value in 'Date Of Service'.
- Enter 'Client 1' created in setup in 'Client ID'.
- Enter any valid 'Service Code' in 'Service Code'.
- Enter any valid 'Practitioner' in 'Practitioner'.
- Click [Submit].
- Enter any valid 'Service Code' in 'Service Code'.
- Click [Submit].
- Close the form.
- Open "Deposit Entry" form.
- Click [Y] in 'Date Of Receipt Or Adjustment'.
- Enter 'Client 1' created in setup in 'Client ID'.
- Select any Episode # from 'Episode Number'.
- Enter the Service Code created in setup in 'Service Code'.
- Select appropriate Guarantor from 'Guarantor'.
- Enter any value in 'Amount To Post'.
- Select Posting Code created in setup from 'Posting Code'.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate the report displays: 'Deposit Amount'.
- Click [Close Report].
- Repeat Steps 13-29.
|
Topics
• Self Pay Payment Redistribution
|
Advanced Billing Rule Definition
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Advanced Billing Rule Definition
- Client Charge Input
Scenario 1: Advanced Billing Rule Definition
Specific Setup:
- Admission:
- An existing client is identified, or a new client is admitted. Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- Two guarantors, identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form. are assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and secondary guarantor.
- Service Codes:
- Service Code 1 = selected in 'Service Code' in 'Advanced Billing Rule Definition' form.
- Service Code 2 = selected in 'Selected Service(s) Must Be Rendered By A Practitioner With One Of The Following Practitioner Categories For Coverage' in 'Advanced Billing Rule Definition' form.
Steps
- Open "Advanced Billing Rule Definition" form.
- Click [Add] in 'Add Or Edit Advanced Billing Rule'.
- Click [Yes] in 'Active'.
- Enter any description in 'Advanced Billing Rule Description'.
- Select 'Service Code 1' in 'Service Code'.
- Select the primary guarantor in 'Guarantor'.
- Enter any value in 'Effective Date'.
- Click desired value in 'Associated To Gender'.
- Click [Compliance] in 'Rule Defines Conditions For *'.
- Select 'Service Code 2' in 'Select Service(s) That Must Also Be Rendered For Distribution'.
- Select desired value in 'Selected Service(s) Must Be Rendered By A Practitioner With One Of The Following Practitioner Categories For Coverage'.
- Set 'Selected Service(s) Must Be Rendered Within How Many Days Prior To The Service For Incident To Services' to '0'.
- Click [File Advanced Billing Rule].
- Verify the message: 'Advanced billing rule filed'.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open "Client Charge Input" form.
- Enter 'Client ID'.
- Enter desired date in 'Date of Service'.
- Enter 'Service Code 1' in 'Service Code'.
- Enter the desired 'Practitioner'.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate Form Return.
- Click [Yes].
- Repeat Steps 18-25 for 'Service Code 2' with same 'Date of Service'.
- Open "Close Charges" form.
- Click [Liability Update] in 'Liability Update Or Close Charges'.
- Enter the date of services given in 'Client Charge Input' in 'Thru Date'.
- Click [Individual] in 'Individual, All, Or Interim Batch Cycle'.
- Enter the 'Client ID'.
- Select the desired 'Episode' in 'Episode Number'.
- Click [Submit].
- Open the "Client Ledger" form.
- Enter the 'Client ID'.
- Click [All Episodes] in 'Claim/Episode/All Episodes'.
- Click [Simple] in 'Ledger Type'.
- Click [Yes] in 'Include Zero Charges'.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the report data to verify that the charges distributed to primary guarantor.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Repeat Steps 1-17.
- Repeat Steps 18-39 with Date of Service for 'Service Code 1' before the Date of Service for 'Service Code 2'.
- Validate the report data to verify that the charges distributed to the secondary guarantor.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
|
Topics
• Advanced Billing Rule Definition
|
AR Roll Forward Report
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- AR Roll Forward Report
- Client Charge Input
Scenario 1: AR Roll Forward Report
Specific Setup:
- User Definition has been used to give the tester access to the report and table:
- Report = Avatar PM->Billing->AR Management->AR Roll Forward Report.
- Table = SYSTEM.ar_roll_forward_rpt.
- Refresh the forms.
- Clients:
- Client 1 has an outstanding balance, with all services being at least 90 days old. Use the Client Ledger' to run a report for the client and save the report.
- Client 2 has no services. Use the Client Ledger' to verify that the client has no services.
Steps
- Open the "AR Roll Forward Report" form.
- Validate that the form opened in the 'AR Roll Forward Compile' section.
- Enter desired date in 'Accounting Period End Date' that is two months in the past. Note that the date will default to the last day of the month/year entered.
- Select desired value in 'Data Export Format'.
- If 'No' is selected, data is prepared in a Crystal report.
- If 'Yes' is selected, is prepared in a Crystal report which can be exported
- Click [Compile] and [OK].
- A message is received that the report will run in the background.
- You can exit the form or log out of the system while the form is running in the background as the length of time varies based on the number of active clients. Once completed, you can reopen the 'AR Roll Forward Report' to view the report.
- Click the 'AR Roll Forward Report' section.
- Click [Run Report].
- The report opens and contains:
- 'Print Report' and 'Export' buttons.
- A left side panel that lists each client in the report.
- The body of the report contains data for the clients and may be more than one page.
- Click [Print Report]. The report opens as a .pdf file.
- Click [Export]. Select the desired format. Click [OK] to generate the export or [Cancel] to cancel the selection.
- If [OK] was clicked the report will open in the desired format and can be saved.
- If [Cancel] was clicked the 'Print Report' and 'Export' buttons display again.
- Verify that the data for 'Client 1' is correct.
- Verify that 'Client 2' is not included in the report.
- Click [Close Report] to close the report.
- Click [Discard] and click [Yes].
- Using a client charge input form enter a minimum of one service for 'Client 2' that is in the previous month, after the month the selected in the 'AR Roll Forward Report' created above.
- Open 'Client Ledger' and process the rep port for 'Client 2'. Verify that the client now has a balance due.
- Open the "AR Roll Forward Report" form.
- Enter desired date in 'Accounting Period End Date' that for the month of the service for 'Client 2'. Note that the date will default to the last day of the month/year entered.
- Select desired value in 'Data Export Format'.
- Click [Compile] and [OK].
- A message is received that the report will run in the background.
- You can exit the form or log out of the system while the form is running in the background as the length of time varies based on the number of active clients. Once completed, you can reopen the 'AR Roll Forward Report' to view the report.
- Click the 'AR Roll Forward Report' section.
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the data for 'Client 1' is still correct because no services, payments, adjustments, or transfers were added.
- Verify that the data for 'Client 2' is correct.
- Click [Close Report] to close the report.
- Click [Discard] and click [Yes].
- If desired, query the 'SYSTEM.ar_roll_forward_rpt' table specific to a client in the report using the 'PATID'.
- Validate the data in the following fields: EPISODE_NUMBER; FACILITY; ID; PATID; account_balance; admission_date; patient_name; patient_type; prior_account_balance; prior_account_balance; total_adjustments; total_charges; and total_payments.
- Close the query.
|
Topics
• AR Roll Forward Report
|
Bed Management - 'Leave Status Change'
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Bed Management
- Leaves
- Leave Status Change
Scenario 1: Bed Management - Validate 'Leaves' and 'Leave Status Change' functionality
Specific Setup:
- A client is enrolled in an existing inpatient episode (Client A).
Steps
- Access the 'Bed Management' form.
- Click the [Print Current Bed Status Report].
- Validate the 'Current Bed Status Report' is displayed and contains "Client A" in their assigned unit/room/bed.
- Close the report.
- Click [Bed Management].
- Navigate to the unit/room/bed for "Client A" and validate they are displayed as expected.
- Close the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Leaves' form.
- Enter the current date in the 'Leave Date' field.
- Enter the current time in the 'Leave Time' field.
- Select any non-billable value in the 'Type Of Leave From' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Reason For Leave' field.
- Populate any other desired fields.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Bed Management' form.
- Click the [Print Current Bed Status Report].
- Validate the 'Current Bed Status Report' is displayed and no longer contains "Client A" in their assigned unit/room/bed since they were placed on a non-billable leave.
- Close the report.
- Click [Bed Management].
- Navigate to the unit/room/bed for "Client A" and validate they are no longer displayed from the 'Leave Date' forward since they were placed on a non-billable leave.
- Close the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Leave Status Change' form.
- Enter the current date in the 'Effective Date Of Leave Status Change' field.
- Enter the current time in the 'Effective Time Of Leave Status Change' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Reason For Closure Of Leave' field.
- Select any non-billable value in the 'Type Of Leave From' field.
- Select the desired value in the 'Reason For Leave' field.
- Populate any other desired fields.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Bed Management' form.
- Click the [Print Current Bed Status Report].
- Validate the 'Current Bed Status Report' is displayed and does not contain "Client A" in their assigned unit/room/bed since they were placed on a non-billable leave.
- Close the report.
- Click [Bed Management].
- Navigate to the unit/room/bed for "Client A" and validate they are not displayed from the 'Leave Date' forward since they were placed on a non-billable leave.
- Close the form.
Bed Management - 'Client Merge' functionality
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: Bed Management - Validate 'Client Merge' functionality
Specific Setup:
- The 'Allow Merging Into Existing Episode' registry setting is set to "Y".
- An inpatient program is defined in 'Program Maintenance' (Program A).
- Units, rooms, and beds are defined (Bed A & Bed B will be used for testing).
- A client is enrolled in "Program A" in "Bed A" with an 'Admission Date' of "01/02/2024" (Client A).
- A second client is enrolled in "Program A" in "Bed B" with an 'Admission Date' of "01/01/2024" (Client B).
Steps
- Access the 'Bed Management' form.
- Click [Bed Management].
- Navigate to the unit & room for "Bed A" and "Bed B".
- Validate "Client A" is in "Bed A" as expected.
- Validate "Client B" is in "Bed B" as expected.
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Client Merge' Form.
- Enter the "Client A" in the 'Source Client' field.
- Enter the "Client B" in 'Target Client' field.
- Select "No" in the 'Merge All Client Data Through Single Filing' field.
- Select the existing episode for "Client A" in the 'Source Client Episode' field.
- Select "No" in the 'Create New Episode On Merge' field.
- Click [File].
- Validate a message is displayed stating: Do you wish to continue with the indicated action?
- Click [Yes].
- Validate a message is displayed stating: The following episode has been updated for the target client indicated to include data from the source episode.
- Click [OK].
- Validate a message is displayed stating: All bed assignments associated with the source episodes have been removed.
- Click [OK] and close the form.
- Access the 'Bed Management' form.
- Click [Bed Management].
- Navigate to the unit & room for "Bed A" and "Bed B".
- Validate "Client B" is in "Bed B" as expected.
- Validate "Client A" is no longer displayed and "Bed A" is available.
- Click [Close] and [Print Current Bed Status Report].
- Validate the 'Current Bed Status Report' is displayed.
- Validate "Client B" is in "Bed B" as expected.
- Validate "Client A" is no longer displayed and "Bed A" is available.
- Close the report.
- Click [Bed Management].
- Navigate to the unit & room for "Bed A" and "Bed B".
- Select "Client B" in "Bed B".
- Click [Switch].
- Select "Bed A" in the 'Bed 2' field and populate the details accordingly.
- Click [Switch].
- Validate "Client B" now displays in "Bed A" as expected.
- Click [Close] and [Print Current Status Report].
- Validate the 'Current Bed Status Report' is displayed.
- Validate "Client B" is in "Bed A" as expected.
- Close the report and the form.
|
Topics
• Bed Management
• Leaves
• Client Merge
|
Remittance Processing Widget
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Remittance Processing Widget
Scenario 1: NTST_Remittance_Processing Widget - Installation
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria': Enable Payment Acknowledgement
- Set the 'Enable Payment Acknowledgement' Registry Setting Value: Y.
- Set the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria': Prevent Posting Payments Unless Payment
- Set the 'Prevent Posting Payments Unless Payment' Registry Setting Value:7.
- User Definition:
- Note the current home view for the logged in user.
- Posting/Adjustment Codes Definition:
- Existing posting code(s) are identified to be used for Payment, Adjustment, and Transfer.
- Admission:
- Client 1:
- An existing client is identified, or a new client is admitted. Note the client's id/name, episode number, and admission program.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- Guarantors are identified, or new guarantors are created to be assigned to the client. Note the guarantor's code/name.
- Financial Eligibility:
- The guarantors identified above are assigned to the client.
- Recurring Client Charge Input:
- 5-6 services are rendered to the client. Note the service start/ end date and service code used.
Steps
- Open the "View Definition" form.
- Select the home view identified in the setup section.
- Click [Launch View Designer].
- Search for the NTST_ Remittance_Processing widget in the list of Available Widgets under the 'Billing' --> 'Remittance Processing'.
- Select NTST_Remittance_Processing widget from 'Available Widgets'.
- Click [>] to move NTST_Remittance_Processing widget to 'Assigned Widgets'.
- Configure the home view to include the widget.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Submit] in View Definition form to save the widget.
- Validate that the Form Return dialog contains 'Form Return View Definition has completed.'
- Click [No].
- Click [My Activity]. Please note: It is located in the top right corner.
- Select 'VIEW/ADD WIDGETS'.
- Click [Reload View].
- Validate that the Confirm Reload dialog contains 'Confirm Reload: Are you sure you want to discard current changes and reload layout from the server?'.
- Click [Yes].
- Review the home view.
- Open "Registry Settings" form.
- Set the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria': Prevent Posting Payments Unless Payment
- Set the 'Prevent Posting Payments Unless Payment' Registry Setting Value:1&3&5.
- Validate the registry setting text area.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate the message 'Successfully filing in the system'.
- Click [OK].
- Verify the NTST_ Remittance_Processing widget is included in the home view.
- Click [Create] in 'Action For Batch'.
- Enter any value in 'Description'.
- Select any value from 'Default Payment Code'.
- Select any value from 'Default Adjustment Code'.
- Select any value from 'Default Transfer Code'.
- Select any date in 'Receipt Date'.
- Select any date in 'Deposit Date'.
- Select any date in 'Posting Date'.
- Click [Remittance Details].
- Click [Add Row].
- Enter 'Client 1' created in setup.
- Select appropriate Guarantor assigned to Client 1 in 'Guar ID'.
- In any of Service Rows, enter any payment amount in 'Pmt amt' .
- Validate the 'Pmt Code' defaults to default Payment Code selected in above batch.
- Enter any Adjustment Amount in 'Adj amt'.
- Validate the 'Adj Code' defaults to default Adjustment Code selected in above batch.
- Enter any Transfer Amount in 'Xfr amt'.
- Validate the 'Xfr Code' defaults to default Transfer Code selected in above batch.
- Select any Guarantor in 'Xfr to Guar'.
- Click [Save and Exit].
- Validate the dialog contains 'Remittance Batch Saved'.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Yes] in 'Remittance Ready To Post'.
- Click [Post Batch].
- Validate the message 'Remittance batch posted. Number of transactions: 1'.
- Click [OK].
|
Topics
• Widgets
• Remittance Processing
|
|
Topics
• Admission
• Update Client Data
• Discharge
• Pre Admit
|
'ClientAdmisison' web service
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Pre Admit
- SOAPUI - ClientAdmission - UpdateAdmission
Scenario 1: The 'ClientAdmission' - 'UpdateAdmission' web service: Change a Pre-Admission Program to an Outpatient Program
Specific Setup:
- A client must be enrolled in an existing pre-admit episode (Client A).
- The 'Allow Admission To File/Edit Pre-Admits' registry setting must be set to "Y".
- The 'Duplicate Date/Time Checking' registry setting must be set to "Y".
- The 'Enable Program Search' registry setting must be set to "1".
- An outpatient program must be defined in the 'Program Maintenance' form.
Steps
- Access SoapUI for the 'ClientAdmission' - 'UpdateAdmission' web service,
- Enter the system code that will be used to access Avatar in the 'SystemCode' field.
- Enter the user name that will be used to access Avatar in the 'UserName' field.
- Enter the password that will be used to access Avatar in the 'Password' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'AdmissionDate' field.
- Enter the desired time in the 'AdmissionTime' field.
- Enter the desired practitioner in the 'AdmittingPractitioner' field.
- Enter the desired practitioner in the 'AttendingPractitioner' field.
- Enter "Client A's" name in the format of LAST,FIRST in the 'ClientName' field.
- Enter "Client A's" existing episode number in the 'EpisodeNumber' field.
- Enter the desired outpatient program in the 'Program' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'SocialSecurityNumber' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'TypeOfAdmission' field.
- Enter "Client A's" ID in the 'ClientID' field.
- Enter "Client A's" existing episode in the 'Episode' field.
- Populate any other desired fields.
- Click [Run].
- Validate the 'Confirmation' field contains "Client Unique ID : # Episode Number : #".
- Validate the 'Message' field contains "Client Admission web service has been filed successfully.
- Validate the 'Status' field contains "1".
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission' form.
- Select the existing episode and click [Edit].
- Validate the 'Client Name' field contains "Client A's" name.
- Validate the 'Preadmit/Admission Date' field contains the date entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Preadmit/Admission Time' field contains the time entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Program' field contains the outpatient program entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Type of Admission' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Admitting Practitioner' field contains the practitioner entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Attending Practitioner' field contains the practitioner entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Social Security Number' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Validate all other filed data displays as expected.
- Click [Submit].
Scenario 2: The 'ClientAdmission' - 'UpdateAdmission' web service: Change a Pre-Admission Program to an Inpatient Program
Specific Setup:
- A client must be enrolled in an existing pre-admit episode (Client A).
- The 'Allow Admission To File/Edit Pre-Admits' registry setting must be set to "Y".
- The 'Duplicate Date/Time Checking' registry setting must be set to "Y".
- The 'Enable Program Search' registry setting must be set to "1".
- An inpatient program must be defined in the 'Program Maintenance' form.
- Units, beds, and rooms must be defined.
Steps
- Access SoapUI for the 'ClientAdmission' - 'UpdateAdmission' web service,
- Enter the system code that will be used to access Avatar in the 'SystemCode' field.
- Enter the user name that will be used to access Avatar in the 'UserName' field.
- Enter the password that will be used to access Avatar in the 'Password' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'AdmissionDate' field.
- Enter the desired time in the 'AdmissionTime' field.
- Enter the desired practitioner in the 'AdmittingPractitioner' field.
- Enter the desired practitioner in the 'AttendingPractitioner' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'Bed' field.
- Enter "Client A's" name in the format of LAST,FIRST in the 'ClientName' field.
- Enter "Client A's" existing episode number in the 'EpisodeNumber' field.
- Enter the desired inpatient program in the 'Program' field.
- Enter the desired room in the 'Room' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'RoomAndBoardBillingCode' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'SocialSecurityNumber' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'TypeOfAdmission' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'SourceOfAdmission' field.
- Enter the desired unit in the 'Unit' field.
- Enter "Client A's" ID in the 'ClientID' field.
- Enter "Client A's" existing episode in the 'Episode' field.
- Populate any other desired fields.
- Click [Run].
- Validate the 'Confirmation' field contains "Client Unique ID : # Episode Number : #".
- Validate the 'Message' field contains "Client Admission web service has been filed successfully.
- Validate the 'Status' field contains "1".
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission' form.
- Select the existing episode and click [Edit].
- Validate the 'Client Name' field contains "Client A's" name.
- Validate the 'Preadmit/Admission Date' field contains the date entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Preadmit/Admission Time' field contains the time entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Program' field contains the inpatient program entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Type of Admission' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Source of Admission' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Admitting Practitioner' field contains the practitioner entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Attending Practitioner' field contains the practitioner entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Social Security Number' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Select the "Inpatient/Partial/Day Treatment" section.
- Validate the 'Unit' field contains the unit entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Room' field contains the room entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Bed' field contains the bed entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Room And Board Billing Code' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Validate all other filed data displays as expected.
- Click [Submit].
Scenario 3: The 'ClientAdmission' - 'UpdateAdmission' web service: Change a Pre-Admission Program to a Partial Hospitalization Program
Specific Setup:
- A client must be enrolled in an existing pre-admit episode (Client A).
- The 'Allow Admission To File/Edit Pre-Admits' registry setting must be set to "Y".
- The 'Duplicate Date/Time Checking' registry setting must be set to "Y".
- The 'Enable Program Search' registry setting must be set to "1".
- A partial hospitalization program must be defined in the 'Program Maintenance' form.
Steps
- Access SoapUI for the 'ClientAdmission' - 'UpdateAdmission' web service,
- Enter the system code that will be used to access Avatar in the 'SystemCode' field.
- Enter the user name that will be used to access Avatar in the 'UserName' field.
- Enter the password that will be used to access Avatar in the 'Password' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'AdmissionDate' field.
- Enter the desired time in the 'AdmissionTime' field.
- Enter the desired practitioner in the 'AdmittingPractitioner' field.
- Enter the desired practitioner in the 'AttendingPractitioner' field.
- Enter "Client A's" name in the format of LAST,FIRST in the 'ClientName' field.
- Enter "Client A's" existing episode number in the 'EpisodeNumber' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'PartialHospHours' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'PartialHospBillingCode' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'PartialHospDays' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'PartialHospEffectiveDate' field.
- Enter the desired partial hospitalization program in the 'Program' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'SocialSecurityNumber' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'TypeOfAdmission' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'SourceOfAdmission' field.
- Enter "Client A's" ID in the 'ClientID' field.
- Enter "Client A's" existing episode in the 'Episode' field.
- Populate any other desired fields.
- Click [Run].
- Validate the 'Confirmation' field contains "Client Unique ID : # Episode Number : #".
- Validate the 'Message' field contains "Client Admission web service has been filed successfully.
- Validate the 'Status' field contains "1".
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission' form.
- Select the existing episode and click [Edit].
- Validate the 'Client Name' field contains "Client A's" name.
- Validate the 'Preadmit/Admission Date' field contains the date entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Preadmit/Admission Time' field contains the time entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Program' field contains the partial hospitalization program entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Type of Admission' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Source of Admission' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Admitting Practitioner' field contains the practitioner entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Attending Practitioner' field contains the practitioner entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Social Security Number' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Select the "Inpatient/Partial/Day Treatment" section.
- Validate the 'Partial Hospitalization Days' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Partial Hospitalization Effective Date' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Partial Hospital Billing Code' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Validate the 'Partial Hospitalization Hours' field contains the value entered in the previous steps.
- Validate all other filed data displays as expected.
- Click [Submit].
|
Topics
• Pre Admit
• Web Services
• Admission
|
|
Topics
• Registry Settings
• Service Codes
• Client Charge Input
• File Import
• Edit Service Information
|
'Services by Program and Group Code' report
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Services by Program and Group Code
Scenario 1: Services by Program and Group Code - Validate report
Specific Setup:
- Group services must exist.
Steps
- Access the 'Services by Program and Group Code' form.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Include Services Starting' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Include Services Through' field.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the 'Services by Program & Group Code' report is displayed.
- Validate the report contains the group services for the defined date range as expected.
- Close the report and the form.
|
Topics
• Report Viewer
|
'Services by Provider and Group Code' report
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Services by Provider and Group Code
Scenario 1: Services by Provider and Group Code - Validate report
Specific Setup:
- Group services must exist.
Steps
- Access the 'Services by Provider and Group Code' form.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Include Services Starting' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Include Services Through' field.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the 'Services By Provider & Group Code' report is displayed.
- Validate the report contains the group services for the defined date range as expected.
- Close the report and the form.
|
Topics
• Report Viewer
|
Payment by Posting Date
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Remittance Processing Widget
- Payment by Posting Date
Scenario 1: Remittance Processing widget - Creating / Saving / Editing / Posting a remittance batch - Unclaimed services
Specific Setup:
- Home View:
- The 'Remittance Processing' widget is added in the home view.
- Registry Setting:
- The registry setting ‘Prevent Posting Payments Unless Payment has been Acknowledged’ does not include the value ‘7’.
- Posting/Adjustment Codes Definition:
- Existing posting code(s) are identified to be used for Payment, Adjustment, and Transfer.
- Admission:
- An existing client is identified, or a new client is admitted. Note the client's id/name, episode number, and admission program.
- Client A.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- Guarantors are identified, or new guarantors are created to be assigned to the client. Note the guarantor's code/name.
- Guarantor 1
- Guarantor 2
- Financial Eligibility:
- The guarantors identified above are assigned to the client.
- Recurring Client Charge Input:
- 5-6 services are rendered to the client. Note the service start/ end date and service code used.
- The charges are closed.
- Client Ledger:
- The services are distributed to the guarantor assigned to the client in the financial eligibility record.
Steps
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger for 'Client A'.
- Verify that there are services charged and they are closed.
- Close the report.
- Select [No].
- Locate the 'Remittance Processing' widget on the home view.
- Select 'Create Batch' in the 'Action for Batch' field.
- Enter a description in the 'Description' field. Note the batch description.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Posting Date' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Receipt Date' field.
- Enter the desired date in the 'Deposit Date' field.
- Leave the 'Check/EFT Number' field blank.
- Enter any desired value in the 'Receipt Number' within the below condition:
- Only Alphabets.
- Select all other fields as required.
- Navigate to the 'Remittance Details' section.
- Click [Add Row].
- Enter 'Client A' in the 'Client' cell.
- Verify that the system displays all the matching clients.
- Select 'Client A' from the results.
- Double-click the 'GuarID#' cell.
- System displays all the available guarantors of the client.
- Select 'Guarantor 1'.
- If the client has 'Claimed' services then search any particular claim number and verify the system returns only the searched 'Claim Number'.
- If the client has 'Unclaimed' services then the result will be returned as 'No matches found, please refine search.'
- Verify the 'Start Date' and 'End Date' are auto-populated with the start and end date of the services rendered to the client.
- Select the desired date of service to post the payment for the service.
- Enter the desired amount in the 'Pmt Amt' field.
- Select the desired code in the 'Pmt Code' field.
- Enter the desired amount in the 'Adj Amt' field.
- Select the desired code in the 'Adj Code' field.
- Enter the desired amount in the 'xfr Amt' field.
- Select the desired code in the 'xfr Code' field.
- Select the desired guarantor in the 'xfer to Guar' field.
- Click [Save and Exit].
- Click [OK].
- Go to the 'Batch' section.
- Select 'Yes' in the 'Remittance Ready to Post'.
- Click [Post Batch].
- Validate the successful posting message.
- Open the 'Crystal report' or any other SQL data viewer tool.
- Query the 'remittance_batch' table for 'Client A'.
- Validate the below in the table:
- Verify the 'ID' column displays the correct batch ID.
- Verify the 'batch_description' column displays the description of the batch created.
- Verify the 'deposit_date' column displays the correct deposit date as entered while creating the batch.
- Verify the 'receipt_date' column displays the correct deposit date as entered while creating the batch.
- Query the 'billing_pay_adj_history table for Client A'.
- Validate the table displays all the information including the below correctly for the posted batch:
- Verify the 'reciept_number' column displays the correct receipt number.
- Verify the 'check_number' column displays the correct receipt number.
- Verify the 'date_of_receipt' column displays the correct receipt date as entered while creating the batch.
- Verify the 'date_of_payment' column displays the correct posting date as entered while creating the batch.
- Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for 'Client A' for the below combination of value(s) for 'Check/EFT Number' and 'Receipt Number':
- Case 1:
- In step 2(f):
- Without any value entered in the 'Check/EFT Number' field.
- In step 2(g):
- With the value of Alphabet, Numbers, and Special characters.
- Example: "ALPHANUM123@".
- Case 2:
- In step 2(f):
- Without any value entered in the 'Check/EFT Number' field.
- In step 2(g):
- Without any value entered in the 'Receipt Number' field.
- Case 3:
- In step 2(f):
- With the value of Alphabet, Numbers, and Special characters.
- Example: "ALPHANUM123@".
- In step 2(g):
- Without any value entered in the 'Receipt Number' field.
- Case 4:
- In step 2(f):
- With the value of only Alphabets.
- Example: "ONLYALPHA".
- In step 2(g):
- Without any value entered in the 'Receipt Number' field.
|
Topics
• Remittance Processing
|
'Client Charge Input' form
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: Client Charge Input - Validate the 'Override Liability Distribution' registry setting
Steps
- Access the 'Registry Settings' form.
- Enter "Override Liability Distribution" in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "Y" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Click [Submit], [OK], and [Yes].
- Repeat steps 1a-1d, then close the form.
- Access the 'Client Charge Input' form.
- Validate the 'Guarantor Override' section is added to the form and is not duplicated.
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Registry Settings' form.
- Enter "Override Liability Distribution" in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Enter "N" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Click [Submit], [OK], and [No].
- Access the 'Client Charge Input' form.
- Validate the 'Guarantor Override' section is removed from the form, as expected.
- Close the form.
|
Topics
• Registry Settings
• Client Charge Input
|
Avatar PM - Smart Search functionality
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Progress Notes (Group and Individual)
Scenario 1: Validate the 'Enable Smart Search Functionality' registry setting
Specific Setup:
- The 'Enable Smart Search Functionality' registry setting is set to "Y".
- The 'Alternate Client Lookup Types to Display' registry setting must be set to include "95&102&176" at a minimum:
- 95 - Client's Home Phone
- 102 - Client's Cell Phone
- 176 - Preferred Name
- A client is enrolled in an existing episode (Client A).
Steps
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Update Client Data' form.
- Enter the desired value in the 'Preferred Name' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'Client's Home Phone' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'Client's Cell Phone' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Navigate to the 'Search Clients' field in the 'My Clients' widget.
- Enter the 'Preferred Name' for "Client A".
- Validate the 'Results' contains "Client A" as expected.
- Enter the 'Home Phone' for "Client A".
- Validate the 'Results' contains "Client A" as expected.
- Enter the 'Cell Phone' for "Client A".
- Validate the 'Results' contains "Client A" as expected.
- Access the 'Progress Notes (Group and Individual)' form.
- In the 'Select Client' field, enter the 'Preferred Name' for "Client A".
- Validate the 'Results' contains "Client A" as expected.
- In the 'Select Client' field, enter the 'Home Phone' for "Client A".
- Validate the 'Results' contains "Client A" as expected.
- In the 'Select Client' field, enter the 'Cell Phone' for "Client A".
- Validate the 'Results' contains "Client A" as expected.
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Update Client Data' form.
- Validate a 'Select Client' dialog is displayed.
- In the 'Select Client' field, enter the 'Preferred Name' for "Client A".
- Validate the 'Results' contains "Client A" as expected.
- In the 'Select Client' field, enter the 'Home Phone' for "Client A".
- Validate the 'Results' contains "Client A" as expected.
- In the 'Select Client' field, enter the 'Cell Phone' for "Client A".
- Validate the 'Results' contains "Client A" as expected.
- Click [Cancel].
|
Topics
• Registry Settings
• Client Search
|
File Import
Scenario 1: File Import: Guarantors Payors Add/Edit
Specific Setup:
- File Import:
- The 'Guarantors/Payors' file type is added to the File Import.
- Create an import file to add a new 'Guarantors/Payors', "File A".
- Create an import file to edit above 'Guarantors/Payors', "File B".
Steps
- Open the "File Import" form.
- Select the "Guarantors/Payors" in 'File Type'.
- Select "Upload New File" in 'Action'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select "File A".
- Select "Compile/Validate File" in 'Action'.
- Select "File A" in 'Files(s)'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the message displays: Compiled
- Click [OK].
- Select "Print File" in 'Action'.
- Select "File A" in 'Files(s)'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the report displays the contents of the file.
- Click [Close Report].
- Select "Post File" in 'Action'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select "File A".
- Validate the message displays: Posted.
- Click [OK].
- Close the form.
- Open the "Guarantors/Payors" form.
- Click [Edit].
- Select the guarantor in "File A".
- Validate the form contains the data based on the uploaded file.
- Close the form.
- Follow steps 1 - 26 for "File B" which edits the guarantor through file import.
File Import
Scenario 1: File Import: Guarantors Payors 835
Specific Setup:
- File Import:
- The 'Guarantors/Payors 835' file type is added to "File Import"
- Create an import file to add invalid 835 details to a Guarantor. "File A".
- Create an import file to add valid 835 details to a valid Guarantor: "File B".
Steps
- Open the "File Import" form.
- Select the 'Guarantors/Payors 835' in 'File Type'.
- Click [Upload New File] in 'Action'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select "File A".
- Click [Compile/Validate File] in 'Action'.
- Select "File A" in 'Files(s)'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the message display: File A contains one or more errors. These errors can be reviewed using 'Print Errors' action.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Print Errors] in 'Action'.
- Select "File A" in 'Files(s)'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the report displays appropriate error messages.
- Click [Close Report].
- Click [Delete File] in 'Action'.
- Select "File A" in 'Files(s)'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate message displays: Deleted.
- Click [Yes].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Upload New File] in 'Action'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select "File B".
- Click [Compile/Validate File] in 'Action'.
- Select "File B" in the 'Files(s)'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the message displays: Compiled.
- Click [OK]
- Click [Print File] in 'Action'.
- Select "File B" in 'Files(s)'.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the report displays the contents of the file.
- Click [Close Report].
- Click [Post File] in 'Action'.
- Select "File B".
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the message displays: Posted.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [OK].
- Open the "Guarantors/Payors" form.
- Click [Edit].
- Select the guarantor in "File B".
- Click [835] item.
- Validate the form contains the data based on the uploaded file.
- Click [Discard].
|
Topics
• Guarantor/Payors
• File Import
|
Dictionary Update - Race OMB Standards
Scenario 1: PM - Dictionary Update - Client - Race OMB Standards, # 981
Specific Setup:
- Dictionary Update:
- PM - Client - # 981 - Race OMB Standards:
- The following values have been added to the dictionary:
- 2131-1 = Other Race
- ASKU = Asked but Unknown
- UNK = Unknown
- The following value has been made inactive.
- 2108-9 = White European
Steps
- Open "Dictionary Update".
- Select 'Client' in 'File'.
- Select 'Individual Data Element' in 'Individual or All Data Elements'.
- Enter/Select the following dictionary: (981) Race OMB Standards **LOCKED**.
- Click [Print Dictionary].
- Validate that the dictionary contains:
- 1002-5 = American Indian or Alaska Native
- 2028-9 = Asian
- 2054-5 = Black or African American
- 2076-8 = Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific Islander
- 2106-3 = White
- 2108-9 = White European-INACTIVE
- 2131-1 = Other Race
- ASKU = Asked but Unknown
- UNK = Unknown
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
|
Topics
• Dictionary
|
CCBHC Billing - CCBHC 837 Professional Billing
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Primary and Add-on Enumerated CCBHC services rendered to the client
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- An add-on service code is created with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Add-On Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- A primary service code is created to have desired number of add-on service with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- Select Multiple Add-On codes = An Add-On code created above is checked
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The primary service, with an add-on service, is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the primary and add-on service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The primary service is fully paid such that primary guarantor pays the full amount of primary service.
- An add-on service is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The PPS charges are closed.
- All CCBHC setup is complete. CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- An add-on service code is created with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Add-On Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- A primary service code is created to have desired number of add-on services with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- Select Multiple Add-On codes = An Add-On code created above is checked
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The primary service is rendered to the client and make sure that the add-on service is also selected for filing.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the primary and add-on service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The primary service is fully paid such that primary guarantor pays the full amount of primary service.
- An add-on service is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The PPS charges are closed.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select desired guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'Compile Complete' message.
- Select "Run Report" in the 'Billing Options' field.
- Select "Print" in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the recently compiled file from the 'File' dropdown.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Verify that the primary, Add-on and PPS services are included in the '837 Professional Submission' link.
- Click [X].
- Click [X].
Scenario 2: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service – Partially paid and transferred remaining liability to CCBHC guarantor from the Non CCBHC guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client, and the add-on service has been saved.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The CCBHC PPS charges are closed.
- Create Interim Billing Batch File:
- An interim billing batch is created to include the service transferred to the CCBHC guarantor.
- Electronic Billing:
- The 837 Professional bill is claimed for the CCBHC guarantor.
- The services distributed to CCBHC guarantors are included in the bill.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'Compile Complete' message.
- Select "Run Report" in the 'Billing Options' field.
- Select "Print" in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the recently compiled file from the 'File' dropdown.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Verify the enumerated and CCBHC PPS service are included in the '837 Professional Submission' link.
- Click [X].
- Compile the bill again for the CCBHC guarantor for the same parameters.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'No Information' found.
- Verify that system does not compile the bill again as the services are claimed.
- Click [X].
Scenario 3: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service –Liability fully transferred to non CCBHC guarantor from the CCBHC guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value.
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary, and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor, and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the enumerated CCBHC charges.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the service.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the PPS charges.
- Create Interim Billing Batch File:
- An interim billing batch is created to include the services distributed to the CCBHC guarantor.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is fully transferred to the secondary Non CCBHC guarantor.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- Set 'Create Claims' field to "No".
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'No Information' found.
- Verify that system does not compile the bill again as the services are claimed.
- Click [X].
Scenario 4: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service distributed to the primary contract CCBHC guarantor and CCBHC PPS service distributed to the another contract CCBHC secondary guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- Two contract CCBHC guarantors are identified to be used as a primary and secondary guarantor. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Configure the primary guarantor for contractual adjustments during liability distribution.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = None.
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- Two contract guarantors are assigned to the client as a primary and secondary guarantor.
- Customize the benefit plan for the primary guarantor such that it only covers the enumerated service and not the PPS service.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- Close the enumerated CCBHC charges.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the service.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- Close the PPS charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is claimed. Note the claim number.
- The service distributed to the secondary guarantor is claimed. Note the claim number.
- Client Ledger:
- Two services on the separate claims.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select secondary CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- Set 'Create Claims' field to "No".
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify the 'No Information Found' message found.
- Click [X].
- Click [X].
CCBHC Billing - Subsequent Bills
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Primary and Add-on Enumerated CCBHC services rendered to the client
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- An add-on service code is created with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Add-On Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- A primary service code is created to have desired number of add-on service with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- Select Multiple Add-On codes = An Add-On code created above is checked
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The primary service, with an add-on service, is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the primary and add-on service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The primary service is fully paid such that primary guarantor pays the full amount of primary service.
- An add-on service is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The PPS charges are closed.
- All CCBHC setup is complete. CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- An add-on service code is created with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Add-On Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- A primary service code is created to have desired number of add-on services with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- Select Multiple Add-On codes = An Add-On code created above is checked
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The primary service is rendered to the client and make sure that the add-on service is also selected for filing.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the primary and add-on service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The primary service is fully paid such that primary guarantor pays the full amount of primary service.
- An add-on service is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The PPS charges are closed.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select desired guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'Compile Complete' message.
- Select "Run Report" in the 'Billing Options' field.
- Select "Print" in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the recently compiled file from the 'File' dropdown.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Verify that the primary, Add-on and PPS services are included in the '837 Professional Submission' link.
- Click [X].
- Click [X].
Scenario 2: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service – Partially paid and transferred remaining liability to CCBHC guarantor from the Non CCBHC guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client, and the add-on service has been saved.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The CCBHC PPS charges are closed.
- Create Interim Billing Batch File:
- An interim billing batch is created to include the service transferred to the CCBHC guarantor.
- Electronic Billing:
- The 837 Professional bill is claimed for the CCBHC guarantor.
- The services distributed to CCBHC guarantors are included in the bill.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'Compile Complete' message.
- Select "Run Report" in the 'Billing Options' field.
- Select "Print" in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the recently compiled file from the 'File' dropdown.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Verify the enumerated and CCBHC PPS service are included in the '837 Professional Submission' link.
- Click [X].
- Compile the bill again for the CCBHC guarantor for the same parameters.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'No Information' found.
- Verify that system does not compile the bill again as the services are claimed.
- Click [X].
Scenario 3: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service –Liability fully transferred to non CCBHC guarantor from the CCBHC guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value.
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary, and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor, and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the enumerated CCBHC charges.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the service.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the PPS charges.
- Create Interim Billing Batch File:
- An interim billing batch is created to include the services distributed to the CCBHC guarantor.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is fully transferred to the secondary Non CCBHC guarantor.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- Set 'Create Claims' field to "No".
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'No Information' found.
- Verify that system does not compile the bill again as the services are claimed.
- Click [X].
Scenario 4: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service distributed to the primary contract CCBHC guarantor and CCBHC PPS service distributed to the another contract CCBHC secondary guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- Two contract CCBHC guarantors are identified to be used as a primary and secondary guarantor. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Configure the primary guarantor for contractual adjustments during liability distribution.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = None.
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- Two contract guarantors are assigned to the client as a primary and secondary guarantor.
- Customize the benefit plan for the primary guarantor such that it only covers the enumerated service and not the PPS service.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- Close the enumerated CCBHC charges.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the service.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- Close the PPS charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is claimed. Note the claim number.
- The service distributed to the secondary guarantor is claimed. Note the claim number.
- Client Ledger:
- Two services on the separate claims.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select secondary CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- Set 'Create Claims' field to "No".
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify the 'No Information Found' message found.
- Click [X].
- Click [X].
CCBHC Billing - Secondary CCBHC billing from a non-CCBHC primary guarantor
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Primary and Add-on Enumerated CCBHC services rendered to the client
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- An add-on service code is created with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Add-On Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- A primary service code is created to have desired number of add-on service with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- Select Multiple Add-On codes = An Add-On code created above is checked
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The primary service, with an add-on service, is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the primary and add-on service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The primary service is fully paid such that primary guarantor pays the full amount of primary service.
- An add-on service is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The PPS charges are closed.
- All CCBHC setup is complete. CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- An add-on service code is created with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Add-On Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- A primary service code is created to have desired number of add-on services with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- Select Multiple Add-On codes = An Add-On code created above is checked
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The primary service is rendered to the client and make sure that the add-on service is also selected for filing.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the primary and add-on service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The primary service is fully paid such that primary guarantor pays the full amount of primary service.
- An add-on service is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The PPS charges are closed.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select desired guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'Compile Complete' message.
- Select "Run Report" in the 'Billing Options' field.
- Select "Print" in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the recently compiled file from the 'File' dropdown.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Verify that the primary, Add-on and PPS services are included in the '837 Professional Submission' link.
- Click [X].
- Click [X].
Scenario 2: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service – Partially paid and transferred remaining liability to CCBHC guarantor from the Non CCBHC guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client, and the add-on service has been saved.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The CCBHC PPS charges are closed.
- Create Interim Billing Batch File:
- An interim billing batch is created to include the service transferred to the CCBHC guarantor.
- Electronic Billing:
- The 837 Professional bill is claimed for the CCBHC guarantor.
- The services distributed to CCBHC guarantors are included in the bill.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'Compile Complete' message.
- Select "Run Report" in the 'Billing Options' field.
- Select "Print" in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the recently compiled file from the 'File' dropdown.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Verify the enumerated and CCBHC PPS service are included in the '837 Professional Submission' link.
- Click [X].
- Compile the bill again for the CCBHC guarantor for the same parameters.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'No Information' found.
- Verify that system does not compile the bill again as the services are claimed.
- Click [X].
Scenario 3: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service –Liability fully transferred to non CCBHC guarantor from the CCBHC guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value.
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary, and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor, and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the enumerated CCBHC charges.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the service.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the PPS charges.
- Create Interim Billing Batch File:
- An interim billing batch is created to include the services distributed to the CCBHC guarantor.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is fully transferred to the secondary Non CCBHC guarantor.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- Set 'Create Claims' field to "No".
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'No Information' found.
- Verify that system does not compile the bill again as the services are claimed.
- Click [X].
Scenario 4: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service distributed to the primary contract CCBHC guarantor and CCBHC PPS service distributed to the another contract CCBHC secondary guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- Two contract CCBHC guarantors are identified to be used as a primary and secondary guarantor. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Configure the primary guarantor for contractual adjustments during liability distribution.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = None.
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- Two contract guarantors are assigned to the client as a primary and secondary guarantor.
- Customize the benefit plan for the primary guarantor such that it only covers the enumerated service and not the PPS service.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- Close the enumerated CCBHC charges.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the service.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- Close the PPS charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is claimed. Note the claim number.
- The service distributed to the secondary guarantor is claimed. Note the claim number.
- Client Ledger:
- Two services on the separate claims.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select secondary CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- Set 'Create Claims' field to "No".
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify the 'No Information Found' message found.
- Click [X].
- Click [X].
CCBHC Billing - Enhanced Secondary Claims Handling
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Primary and Add-on Enumerated CCBHC services rendered to the client
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- An add-on service code is created with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Add-On Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- A primary service code is created to have desired number of add-on service with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- Select Multiple Add-On codes = An Add-On code created above is checked
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The primary service, with an add-on service, is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the primary and add-on service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The primary service is fully paid such that primary guarantor pays the full amount of primary service.
- An add-on service is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The PPS charges are closed.
- All CCBHC setup is complete. CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- An add-on service code is created with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Add-On Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- A primary service code is created to have desired number of add-on services with the following:
- Service Code Category = Primary Code
- Service Code Type = desired value
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- Select Multiple Add-On codes = An Add-On code created above is checked
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The primary service is rendered to the client and make sure that the add-on service is also selected for filing.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the primary and add-on service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The primary service is fully paid such that primary guarantor pays the full amount of primary service.
- An add-on service is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The PPS charges are closed.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select desired guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'Compile Complete' message.
- Select "Run Report" in the 'Billing Options' field.
- Select "Print" in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the recently compiled file from the 'File' dropdown.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Verify that the primary, Add-on and PPS services are included in the '837 Professional Submission' link.
- Click [X].
- Click [X].
Scenario 2: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service – Partially paid and transferred remaining liability to CCBHC guarantor from the Non CCBHC guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client, and the add-on service has been saved.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the services.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is partially paid, and the remaining liability is transferred to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- The CCBHC PPS charges are closed.
- Create Interim Billing Batch File:
- An interim billing batch is created to include the service transferred to the CCBHC guarantor.
- Electronic Billing:
- The 837 Professional bill is claimed for the CCBHC guarantor.
- The services distributed to CCBHC guarantors are included in the bill.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'Compile Complete' message.
- Select "Run Report" in the 'Billing Options' field.
- Select "Print" in 'Print Or Delete Report'.
- Select the recently compiled file from the 'File' dropdown.
- Click [Print 837 Report].
- Verify the enumerated and CCBHC PPS service are included in the '837 Professional Submission' link.
- Click [X].
- Compile the bill again for the CCBHC guarantor for the same parameters.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'No Information' found.
- Verify that system does not compile the bill again as the services are claimed.
- Click [X].
Scenario 3: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service –Liability fully transferred to non CCBHC guarantor from the CCBHC guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- A commercial guarantor and a CCBHC guarantor are identified. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = Same Claim: Hold PPS Charges for Remittances from Private Insurance and Group with Component Services on the Same Claim
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value.
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary, and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified, or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- A commercial guarantor is assigned to the client as a secondary guarantor, and a CCBHC guarantor is assigned to the client as a primary guarantor identified in the 'Guarantors/Payors' form.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the enumerated CCBHC charges.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the service.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor only.
- Close Charges:
- Close the PPS charges.
- Create Interim Billing Batch File:
- An interim billing batch is created to include the services distributed to the CCBHC guarantor.
- Electronic Billing:
- The services distributed to the primary guarantor are claimed. Note the claim number.
- Individual Cash Posting:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is fully transferred to the secondary Non CCBHC guarantor.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- Set 'Create Claims' field to "No".
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify 'No Information' found.
- Verify that system does not compile the bill again as the services are claimed.
- Click [X].
Scenario 4: CCBHC Billing - 837 Professional - Enumerated CCBHC service distributed to the primary contract CCBHC guarantor and CCBHC PPS service distributed to the another contract CCBHC secondary guarantor
Specific Setup:
- CCBHC Billing functionality is used by the agency. All CCBHC setup is complete.
- If the functionality is desired, but not installed, please contact your Netsmart Client Alignment Representative.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- Two contract CCBHC guarantors are identified to be used as a primary and secondary guarantor. Note the guarantor's code/name for each guarantor.
- Configure the primary guarantor for contractual adjustments during liability distribution.
- Guarantor/Program Billing defaults:
- A 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults' template has been created for the guarantor and has a value of 'Yes' in 'CCBHC Template'.
- The guarantors identified above, and the admission program of the client are assigned to this template.
- 837 Professional:
- CCBHC Claim Grouping = None.
- Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM) =1.
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the template name, name of the guarantor and name of the admission program.
- An active 'CCBHC PPS Service Definition' exists.
- Dictionary Update:
- A value of "Yes" is added in 'CCBHC Location' in the extended dictionary for 'Client, 10006, Location', for a minimum of one location.
- Service codes:
- A CCBHC Enumerated service code is created with the following:
- Type of Fee = desired value
- CCBHC Enumerated Service = Yes
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Note the code and definition.
- Service Fee/ Cross Reference Maintenance:
- A fee definition is created for the primary and add-on service codes created/identified in the 'Service Codes' form.
- Admission:
- An existing outpatient client is identified or a new client is admitted in the program identified in the 'Guarantor/Program billing defaults' form.
- Note client id, admission program, admission date.
- Financial Eligibility:
- Two contract guarantors are assigned to the client as a primary and secondary guarantor.
- Customize the benefit plan for the primary guarantor such that it only covers the enumerated service and not the PPS service.
- Diagnosis:
- An active diagnosis record is created for the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- The CCBHC Enumerated service is rendered to the client.
- Client Ledger:
- The liability for the CCBHC Enumerated service is distributed to the primary guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- Close the enumerated CCBHC charges.
- CCBHC PPS Compile:
- The CCBHC PPS Compile process has been processed for the service.
- Client Ledger:
- The CCBHC PPS service created via compile distributes to the secondary CCBHC guarantor.
- Close Charges:
- Close the PPS charges.
- Electronic Billing:
- The service distributed to the primary guarantor is claimed. Note the claim number.
- The service distributed to the secondary guarantor is claimed. Note the claim number.
- Client Ledger:
- Two services on the separate claims.
Steps
- Open the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select an "837 Professional" from the 'Billing Form'.
- Select "Individual" from the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select secondary CCBHC guarantor from the 'Guarantor' drop down.
- Select "Outpatient" from the 'Billing Type' field.
- Select "Sort File" option from the 'Billing Options'
- Select "Yes" in 'Include CCBHC Services' to include the CCBHC service.
- Set 'Create Claims' field to "No".
- All other fields are populated as required/needed.
- Click [Process].
- Verify the 'No Information Found' message found.
- Click [X].
- Click [X].
|
Topics
• 837 Professional
• CCBHC
|
Dynamic fields/forms
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance
Scenario 1: Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance - Multiple Definitions on Same Date - Dynamic Messaging
|
Topics
• Disclosure
|
Remittance Processing Widget
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Remittance Processing Widget
Scenario 1: Remittance Processing Widget - Refresh functionality and Registry Setting = ' 'Enable Guarantor Sort By Name' help message validation
Specific Setup:
- Home View:
- The 'Remittance Processing' widget is added in the home view.
- Posting/Adjustment Codes Definition:
- Existing posting code(s) are identified to be used for Payment, Adjustment, and Transfer.
- Admission:
- An existing client is identified, or a new client is admitted. Note the client's id/name, episode number, and admission program.
- Client A.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- Guarantors are identified, or new guarantors are created to be assigned to the client. Note the guarantor's code/name.
- Guarantor 1
- Financial Eligibility:
- The guarantors identified above are assigned to the client.
- Client Charge Input:
- 5-6 services are rendered to the client. Note the service start/end dates and service code used.
- The charges are closed.
- Client Ledger:
- The services are distributed to the guarantor assigned to the client in the financial eligibility record.
Steps
- Locate the 'Remittance Processing' widget on the home view.
- Click [Create Batch] in the 'Action for Batch' field.
- Enter a description in the 'Description' field. Note the batch description.
- Navigate to the 'Remittance Details' section.
- Click [Add Row].
- Enter 'Client A' created in the setup in the 'Client' cell.
- Double-click the 'GuarID#' cell.
- Select 'Guarantor 1' from setup.
- Verify the 'Start Date' and 'End Date' fields contain the start and end date of the services rendered to the Client.
- For any service row, enter the desired amount in the 'Pmt Amt' field.
- Select the desired code in the 'Pmt Code' field.
- For any service row, enter the desired amount in the 'Adj Amt' field.
- Select the desired code in the 'Adj Code' field.
- For any service row, enter, the desired amount in the 'xfr Amt' field.
- Select the desired code in the 'xfr Code' field.
- Select the desired guarantor in the 'xfer to Guar' field.
- Click [Save and Exit].
- Validate the message 'Remittance batch saved'.
- Click [OK].
- Go to the 'Batch' section.
- Click [Edit] in the 'Action for Batch' field.
- Select the desired batch created above in 'Remittance Batch Number'.
- Validate 'Payment Posted' populates with the amount entered in the batch.
- Validate 'Adjustment Posted' populates with the amount entered in the batch.
- Validate 'Transfer Posted 'populates with the amount entered in the batch.
- Click [Refresh].
- Validate the widget has no records to display.
- Open the "Registry Settings" form.
- Set the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' to 'Enable Guarantor Sort By Name'.
- Click [Yes] in 'Include Hidden Registry Settings'.
- Validate the 'Registry Setting Details' section includes 'Remittance Processing'.
- Validate the 'Registry Setting Value' is set to 'Y'.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate Form Return Dialog.
- Click [No].
- Locate the 'Remittance Processing' widget on the home view.
- Click [Create Batch] in the 'Action for Batch' field.
- Enter a description in the 'Description' field. Note the batch description.
- Validate 'Default Guarantor' displays Guarantor by name.
- Click [Refresh].
- Repeat steps 27-32 ,with 'Registry Setting Value' is set to 'N'.
- Click [Submit].
- Validate Form Return Dialog.
- Click [No].
- Locate the 'Remittance Processing' widget on the home view.
- Click [Create Batch] in the 'Action for Batch' field.
- Enter a description in the 'Description' field. Note the batch description.
- Validate 'Default Guarantor' displays Guarantor by number.
- Click [Refresh].
|
Topics
• Registry Settings
• Widgets
|
Client Merge
Scenario 1: Cal-PM -Client Merge (InPatient and Outpatient)
Specific Setup:
- At least two clients must be admitted to active episodes.
Steps
- Open "Client Merge" form.
- Validate the warning contains: The Client Merge process uses significant system resources. It is recommended to run after hours or during your lowest usage time to prevent any performance impacts.
- Click [OK].
- Enter the 'Source Client'.
- Enter the 'Target Client'.
- Select desired option in 'Merge All Client Data Through Single Filing'.
- Select desired episode from 'Source Client Episode'.
- Select desired option in 'Create New Episode On Merge'.
- Click [File].
- Validate the following message displays: 'Do you wish to continue with the indicated action?'
- Click [Yes].
- Validate the following message displays: 'The following new episode has been created for the target client indicated. Episode x'.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Open "Admission" form.
- Enter the "Target Client".
- Verify the merged episode data is present.
- Click [Cancel].
|
Topics
• Client Merge
|
NCPDP - new tables and NCPDP Claim Submission Response Report
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- NCPDP System Defaults
- Electronic Billing
- NCPDP Claim Submission Response Report
Scenario 1: NCPDP Claim Submission Response Report
Specific Setup:
- The Avatar application must be associated with an RxConnect Instance and configured to communicate via HL7.
- There must be active connections between Avatar and RxConnect for "ADT", "ORDERS", "FILL DETAILS", and "BILLING".
- The "ADT" and "ORDERS" connections must have both values selected in the 'Sub System Code Facility ID(s) Supported' field and the 'Include Sub System Code Facility ID in Outbound Message' field in the 'HL7 Connection Manager' form, which is a Netsmart Staff Only form. Please contact your Netsmart Representative.
- CE2000 must be installed and configured on the Database server.
- The 'Avatar PM->Billing->Electronic Billing->NCPDP->->Enable NCPDP Billing' registry setting must be set to "Y".
- The 'Create New Fill For Every Change In NDC' field must be set to "Yes" in the 'NCPDP System Defaults' form.
- The user logged into the application must have access to the 'SYSTEM.ncpdp_system_defaults' table.
- Please log out of the application and log back in after completing the above configuration.
- A client must have an active inpatient episode. (Client A)
- “Client A” and "Client B" must have a ‘Date of Birth’, ‘Sex’ and address on file in the ‘Update Client Data’ form, as well as information filed in the ‘Allergies and Hypersensitivities’ form, ‘Diagnosis’ form, and in the ‘Height’ and ‘Weight’ fields in the ‘Vitals Entry’ form.
- "Client A" and "Client B" must be associated with an NCPDP guarantor in the 'Financial Eligibility' form.
- "Client A" must have three active pharmacy-type orders each with a duration of "60 Days" that starts in the past and have been processed in RxConnect. (Order A) (Order B) (Order C)
- "Order A" must have a 'Frequency' of "Every Day"
- "Order B" must have a 'Frequency' of "Twice A Day" administration times at "09:00 AM" and "09:00 PM".
- "Order C" must have a 'Frequency of "3 Times A Day" with administration times at "09:00 AM", "03:00 PM", and "09:00 PM".
- "Order A" and "Order C" must have one active NDC #.(NDC A) (NDC B)
- "Order B" must have two active NDC #'s. (NDC C) (NDC D)
- "Order A" must be administered for the first 14 days of a month using "NDC A".
- "Order B" must be administered for the first 14 days of a month, where the "09:00 AM" administration on each day is using "NDC C" and administered for the "09:00 PM" administration for the same days with "NDC D".
- "Order C" must be administered seven times starting at the first of a month using "NDC B".
- Charges must be batched in RxConnect.
- Charges must be compiled and posted in the 'Compile Inbound HL7 Charge Batch File' and 'Post Inbound HL7 Charge Batch File' forms.
- Charges must be rolled up and posted in the 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist' form.
- Charges must be closed for "Client A".
Steps
- Access the 'NCPDP System Defaults' form.
- Select "No" in the 'Create New Fill For Every Change In NDC' field and click [Submit].
- Validate a "Filed" message is displayed and click [OK].
- Close the form.
- Access the 'Electronic Billing' form.
- Select "NCPDP" in the 'Billing Form' field.
- Select "Medicare Part D" in the 'Type Of Bill' field.
- Select "Individual" in the 'Individual Or All Guarantors' field.
- Select the NCPDP guarantor associated with "Client A" in the 'Guarantor' field.
- Select "Inpatient" in the 'Billing Type' field
- Select "Sort File" in the 'Billing Options' field
- Set the 'File Description' field to any value.
- Select "All Clients" in the 'All Clients Or Interim Billing Batch' field.
- Select the program associated with "Client A" in the 'Program(s)' field.
- Select "Yes" in the 'Create Claims' field.
- Set the 'Date Of Claim' field to the first date of service for all orders.
- Set the 'First Date Of Service To Include' field to the first date of service for all orders.
- Set the 'Last Date of Service To Include' field to the last date of service for all orders.
- Click [Process].
- Validate a "Compile Complete" message is displayed and click [OK].
- Select "Create File On Server" in the 'Billing Options' field.
- Select the file description name in the 'File' field
- Click [Process].
- Validate a "File(s) created." message is displayed and click [OK].
- Close the form.
- The file is processed through CE2000.
- Access the 'NCPDP Claim Submission Response Report' form.
- Select the appropriate file description in the 'Claim Submission File' form and click [Run Report].
- Validate the 'NCPDP Claim Submission Response Report' is displayed and contains values in the 'Processing Notes' section of the report and all relevant data.
- Click [Close Report].
- Create a report using the 'SYSTEM.ncpdp_system_defaults' table and validate that the information filed in the 'NCPDP System Defaults' form are displayed.
|
Topics
• NCPDP System Defaults
• NCPDP
|
Real Time Inquiry (270) Request
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Eligibility Response (271) Report
Scenario 1: PM - Enable RevConnect = YA - Real Time Inquiry (270) Request
Specific Setup:
- Netsmart Client Alignment Associate has been contacted to enable 'RevConnect'.
- Netsmart Avatar support has completed the following:
- Enabled the 'Enable RevConnect' registry setting has been updated to contain 'YA'.
- Completed & submitted the 'RevConnect Configuration' form.
- 'System Generated Email Settings' has been used to add the tester’s email to enable notification verification.
- Registry Setting:
- The 'Enable 270/271 Transaction Sets' registry setting is set to 'Y'.
- Eligibility Inquiry (270/271) Real-Time Setup:
- The 'Access Point Type' contains a 'RevConnect' option only when the 'Enable RevConnect' registry setting has a value of 'YA'.
- The 'RevConnect Account Key' field is added to the form when the 'Enable RevConnect' registry setting has a value of 'YA'.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- An existing guarantor is identified and has a value of:
- 'Yes' in 'Support 270/271 Transaction Sets' of the '270 / 271 / 834' sections.
- A value in 'Real Time 270/271 Access Point'.
- Add desired data to other fields, noting the values.
- Admission:
- A client is admitted to a program, or an existing client is identified. Note client id/name, admission date/program.
- Financial Eligibility: The above guarantor is assigned to client.
- Based on the setup in the '270 / 271 / 834' section of 'Guarantors/Payors', the client either has one, or any combination of the following: services, appointments, or an eligibility request in financial eligibility.
- Eligibility Inquiry (270/271) Real-Time Setup:
- The 'Access Point Type' contains a 'RevConnect' option only when the 'Enable RevConnect' registry setting has a value of 'YA'.
- The 'RevConnect Account Key' field is added to the form when the 'Enable RevConnect' registry setting has a value of 'YA'.
Steps
- Open 'Real Time Inquiry (270) Request'.
- Create a request for the client.
- Close the form.
- Open 'Eligibility Inquiry And Response (270/271) Report'.
- Enter the 'Client' ID' and other desired data.
- Click 'Display Report'.
- Validate the report data.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Open 'Real Time Inquiry (270) Request'.
- Enter the 'Client ID', 'Guarantor' and other desired data.
- Click [Process Report].
- Click [OK].
- Review the report data.
- Validate that the 'Response' field contains the correct data.
- If desired, click [Post Inquiry].
- Close the form.
- Open 'CareFabric Monitor'.
- Enter the desired 'From Date', 'Through Date' and 'Client ID'.
- Click [View Activity Log].
- Review the data to ensure the events/actions were created.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
|
Topics
• Real Time Inquiry (270) Request
• RevConnect
|
Scheduling Calendar
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Service Codes
- Payment Acknowledgement
Scenario 1: Scheduling Calendar - Check In/Check Out
Specific Setup:
- Service Codes:
- A pre-payment service code is added such that 'Group Code' =Non-Billable and 'Covered Charge Category'= Non Billable. (Service Code A).
- Posting Adjustment Codes Definition:
- Add new or edit existing Payment Posting Code and ensure it has a payment reversal posting code associated with it. (Posting Code 1).
- Registry Settings:
- Set 'Enable Payment Acknowledgement' to "Y".
- Select "4" in 'Prevent Posting Payments Unless Payment has been Acknowledged'.
- Select "1" in 'Add Previous Balance To Expected Self Pay Amount'.
- Select "Y" in ' 'Include Guarantors with Self Pay System Financial Class'.
- Set 'Pre Payment Service Code' to "Service Code A".
- Set 'Pre Payment Default Posting Code "Posting Code 1".
- Dictionary Update:
- Add new dictionary update in 'Payor' file type, data element (1000) Financial Class, set 'Self Pay' value for Extended Dictionary Data Element 'System Financial Class'.
- Guarantors/Payors:
- Add new guarantor and set Financial Class = 'System Financial Class'.
- A Self Pay guarantor with Financial Class =s Self Pay. Note the Guarantor id/name.
- Admission:
- Client:
- An inpatient or outpatient client or an existing client is identified. Note the client ID/name, and admission date/program.
- Self pay guarantor identified above is assigned to the Client.
Steps
- Open the "Scheduling Calendar" form.
- Select desired date and time for appointment.
- Right click on any desired time.
- Click [Add Appointment].
- Enter the 'Client ID'.
- Enter the desired service code in 'Service Code'.
- Click [Submit].
- Right click on the appointment created above.
- Click [Check In].
- Verify the 'Expected Self Pay Amount'.
- Enter desired amount in 'Amount Received at Check in'.
- Click [Submit].
- Verify the report displays correct data.
- Click [Close Report].
- Click [Dismiss].
- Open any SQL reporting tool.
- Query the following table: SYSTEM.unacknowledged_payments
- Verify JOIN_TO_APPT_ID column is populated with value.
- Close the Query.
- Open "Payment Acknowledgement" form.
- Click [Post Front Office and myHP Payments].
- Click [T] in 'Payment Collection Date'.
- Select desired value from 'Treatment Service'.
- Select desired value from 'Type'.
- Click [Review].
- Select the desired service from the grid.
- Click [Save].
- Enter desired number in 'Batch Number'.
- Click [T] in 'Deposit Date'.
- Select desired value from 'Category'.
- Enter any desired number in 'BankRef #'.
- Click [Post].
- Validate the message filed successfully.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Open "Client Ledger" form.
- Enter the 'Client ID'.
- Click [All Episodes] in 'Claim/Episodes/All Episodes'.
- Click [Simple] in 'Ledger Type'.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the ledger report displays correct data.
- Click [X].
- Open "Scheduling Calendar" form.
- Right click on the appointment created above.
- Click [Check Out].
- Verify 'Self Pay Owed' amount and 'Received at Checked In'.
- Verify 'Expected Self Pay Amount'.
- Click [Submit].
- Verify the report.
- Click [Close Report].
- Click [Dismiss].
- Repeat steps to verify ledger report displays correct data.
|
Topics
• Scheduling Calendar
|
The 'Day Program Attendance' widget
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Day Program Attendance Widget
Scenario 1: Day Program Attendance widget - Validate 'Complete Close' functionality with multiple practitioners
Specific Setup:
- Please note: this is for Avatar NX only.
- The 'Day Program Attendance' widget must be added to a view in 'View Definition'.
- The logged in user must have the 'Day Program Attendance' widget accessible from their myDay view.
- A program is defined in 'Program Maintenance' with the following (Program A):
- "Yes" selected in the 'Is This A Day Program?' field.
- A service code selected in the 'Day Program Missed Visit Service Code' field.
- One or more active service codes selected in the 'Day Program Services' section (Service Code A).
- A schedule configured for Monday through Friday in the 'Day Program Schedule' section.
- Two practitioners are defined (Practitioner A & Practitioner B).
- A client is admitted into "Program A" (Client A).
Steps
- Navigate to the 'Day Program Attendance' widget.
- Select "Program A" in the 'Program' field.
- Select the desired practitioner in the 'Practitioner' field.
- Please note: this will be the default 'Practitioner' for all rows unless a different practitioner is selected in each individual row.
- Validate "Client A" is displayed in the 'Day Program Attendance' widget.
- Validate the 'Start Time' and 'Close Time' fields contain the times configured in 'Program Maintenance'.
- Validate the row for "Client A" does not contain a value in the 'In', 'Out', and 'Service' fields.
- Click [Complete Close].
- Validate a message is displayed stating: All clients must have a time recorded before close can be completed.
- Enter the desired time in 'In' field.
- Enter the desired time in the 'Out' field.
- Validate the 'Length' field contains the total time between the 'In' and 'Out' times.
- Select "Service Code A" in the 'Service' field.
- Validate the 'Practitioner' field is displayed and contains a list of practitioners in alphabetical order by last name.
- Select "Practitioner A" in the 'Practitioner' field.
- Validate the 'Total' field contains the total time between the 'In' and 'Out' times.
- Click on the [Return] icon.
- Validate a second row is added for "Client A" with:
- 'PATID' containing the PATID for "Client A". Please note: 'Name' field will not be populated for 'Return' rows.
- 'In' time with the current time.
- 'Length' field will contain * indicating this is a running count until an 'Out' time is calculated.
- 'Practitioner' with the 'Practitioner' selected in the main row (if one is selected). In this case, it will be "Practitioner A".
- Enter the desired time in the 'Out' field.
- Validate the 'Length' field contains the total time between the 'In' and 'Out' times for the second row.
- Select "Service Code A" in the 'Service' field.
- Select "Practitioner B" in the 'Practitioner' field.
- Validate the 'Total' field contains the sum of the total times from row 1 and row 2.
- Click [Complete Close].
- Validate a 'Day Program Posting Authentication' dialog is displayed.
- Enter the logged in username in the 'User ID' field.
- Enter the password for the logged in user in the 'Password' field.
- Click [OK].
- Validate "Client A" is no longer displayed in the 'Day Program Attendance' widget.
- Validate the gray/disabled text field at the top of the widget contains: Close completed for today.
- Access the 'Client Ledger' form.
- Select "Client A" in the 'Client ID' field.
- Select "All Episodes" in the 'Claim/Episode/All Episodes' field.
- Select "Simple" in the 'Ledger Type' field.
- Select "Yes" in the 'Include Zero Charges' field.
- Click [Process].
- Validate the 'Client Ledger Report' contains two rows for "Service Code A".
- Two services will be displayed: One for the service with "Practitioner A" and one for the service with "Practitioner B".
- Click [Close] and close the form.
- Access Crystal Reports or other SQL Reporting Tool.
- Create a report using the 'SYSTEM.billing_tx_history' SQL table.
- Validate two rows are displayed for the posted service for "Client A".
- One row will contain the following:
- 'duration' = the 'Length' from the first row for "Client A" in the 'Day Program Attendance' widget
- 'SERVICE_CODE' = "Service Code A"
- 'PROVIDER_ID' = "Practitioner A"
- Another row will contain the following:
- 'duration' = the 'Length' from the second row for "Client A" in the 'Day Program Attendance' widget
- 'SERVICE_CODE' = "Service Code A"
- 'PROVIDER_ID' = "Practitioner B"
- Close the report.
|
Topics
• Day Program Attendance
|
Console Widget Viewer - Admission Data
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Update Client Data
- Console Widget Viewer
- Pre Admit
Scenario 1: 'All Documents' widget - Validate multiple 'Admission' records for the same client
Specific Setup:
- Please note: this is for Avatar NX only.
- A Documentation View must be set up on a user's view containing the 'All Documents' widget and the 'Console Widget Viewer' ('All Documents' view).
- The 'All Documents' widget must contain a 'Multi-Form Tab' with the 'Admission' form assigned. This will be referred to as the "Admission" tab.
Steps
- Access the 'Admission' form.
- Admit a new client into Episode 1. Note: this will be referred to as "Client A".
- Populate all required and desired fields.
- Select the desired value in the 'Type of Admission' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'Admission Comments' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and access the 'Admission' form.
- Click [Add] to admit the client into Episode 2.
- Populate all required and desired fields.
- Select the desired value in the 'Type of Admission' field.
- Enter the desired value in the 'Admission Comments' field.
- Submit the form.
- Select "Client A" and navigate to the 'All Documents' view.
- In the 'All Documents' widget, select the "Admission" tab.
- Select the 'Admission' record for Episode 1.
- Click to view the record and validate it displays as expected in the 'Console Widget Viewer'.
- Validate the proper admission data for Episode 1 is displayed.
- Click [Close All].
- Select the 'Admission' record for Episode 2.
- Click to view the record and validate it displays as expected in the 'Console Widget Viewer'.
- Validate the proper admission data for Episode 2 is displayed.
- Click [Close All].
|
Topics
• Admission
|
SQL table
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Form and Table Documentation (PM)
Internal Test Only
Modifiers by Practitioner Category
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- MODIFIERS BY PRACTITIONER CATEGORY
- Client Charge Input
- Create Interim Billing Batch File
- Electronic Billing
Scenario 1: Modifiers by Practitioner Category - workflow
Specific Setup:
- Form Designer: If previously used to modify the 'Modifiers By Practitioner Category' form, it may be necessary to revert to 'Netsmart Produced Changes'.
- Registry Settings:
- Set the 'Enable Duplicate Service Modifiers' registry setting to "Y".
- Program Maintenance:
- Identify a minimum of two outpatient programs: Program 1 & Program 2.
- Guarantors/Payor:
- Identify a minimum of two guarantors in different Financial Classes: Guarantor 1 & Guarantor 2.
- Practitioner Enrollment:
- Identify a minimum of two practitioners in different Practitioner Categories. Practitioner Category 1 & Practitioner Category 2.
- CPT Code:
- Identify a minimum of two CPT Codes. CPT Code 1 & CPT Code 2.
- Service Codes:
- Service Code 1: An existing service code is identified that contains CPT Code 1, or a new Service Code is created. The service code has a fee record.
- Service Code 2: An existing service code is identified that contains CPT Code 2, or a new Service Code is created. The service code has a fee record.
- Clients:
- Client 1:
- Is admitted to Program 1.
- Diagnosis records are created for the client.
- The financial eligibility record contains Guarantor 1 as the primary guarantor.
- Client Charge Input is used to create a minimum of one service for each service code.
- Client Ledger validates that the charges distributed to Guarantor 1.
- Close Charges has been used to close the charges.
- If desired, create an interim billing batch.
- Client 2:
- Is admitted to Program 2
- Diagnosis records are created for the client.
- The financial eligibility record contains Guarantor 2 as the primary guarantor.
- Client Charge Input is used to create a minimum of one service for each service code.
- Client Ledger validates that the charges distributed to Guarantor 2.
- Close Charges has been used to close the charges.
- If desired, create an interim billing batch.
Steps
- Open the "Modifiers by Practitioner Categories" form.
- Validate that the form has the following fields:
- Guarantor ID - required
- Financial Class Selection
- Program - required
- Treatment Setting Selection
- CPT Code - required
- Practitioner Category - required
- Start Date
- End Date
- Modifier - required
- Duplicate Service Modifiers
- Delete Modifiers button
- Print Modifiers button
- Export Modifiers button
- If desired, click [Print Modifiers] to receive a report of records already filed in the system.
- Select the classes for 'Guarantor 1' and 'Guarantor 2' in 'Financial Class Selection'.
- Verify that only guarantors in those classes display in 'Guarantor ID'.Select 'Guarantor 1' and 'Guarantor 2' in 'Guarantor ID'.
- Select 'Outpatient' in 'Treatment Setting Selection'.
- Verify that only 'Outpatient' programs display in 'Program'.
- Select 'Program 1 in 'Program'.
- Select 'CPT Code 1' in 'CPT Code'.
- Select 'Practitioner Category 1' in 'Practitioner Category'.
- Validate that the 'Modifier' field is marked as required.
- Enter an invalid format values in 'Duplicate Service Modifiers' similar to "Invalid_Test".
- Verify that an error displays "Invalid Format" with an 'OK' button.
- Click [OK].
- Enter up to two values for 'Duplicate Service Modifiers' similar to "D1,D2".
- Verify that the 'Modifier' field is no longer required.
- Enter up to four values in 'Modifiers' similar to "M1,M2".
- Enter the 'Start Date' and 'End Date' values.
- Select [Submit].
- Select the same parameters just submitted:
- Click [Print Modifiers.] and validate that report contains the requested record.
- Click [Export Modifiers] and validate that the export file contains the requested record.
- Close the form.
- Create a query of the SQL table:' SYSTEM.mods_by_category' and validate that the Modifiers filed above are added in the table as individual rows.
- Note that there may be pre-existing data in the table.
- If desired, select a row of data that can be deleted in the form. Note the details.
- Close the query.
- Open the "Modifiers By Practitioner Category" form.
- If desired, enter the details noted in the table and click [Delete Modifiers].
- Verify that a message displays: 'You Are About To Delete Modifiers. Are You Sure You Want To Continue?' and that the message has 'OK' and 'Cancel' buttons. Continue as desired.
- Select 'Guarantor 2' in 'Guarantor ID'.
- Select 'Outpatient' in 'Treatment Setting Selection'.
- Select 'Program 2' in 'Program'.
- Select 'CPT Code 2' in 'CPT Code'.
- Select 'Practitioner Category 2' in 'Practitioner Category'.
- Enter desired values for 'Modifiers' similar to "M3,M4".
- Enter desired values for 'Duplicate Service Modifiers' similar to "D3,D4".
- Enter the 'Start Date' and 'End Date' values.
- Select [Submit].
- If desired, print the report for the parameters just submitted and validate the data,
- If desired, create a query of the SQL table:' SYSTEM.mods_by_category' and validate that the record filed above is added to the table.
- Close the query.
- Open the "Electronic Billing" form.
- Create the 837 Professional bills for each client.
- Review the dump file.
- Validate that the modifiers are correct in the service level 'SV1' segment.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
File Import - Modifiers by Practitioner Category
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- MODIFIERS BY PRACTITIONER CATEGORY
Scenario 1: File Import - Modifiers by Practitioner Category
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings: 'Enable Duplicate Service Modifiers' is set to "Y".
- The following files exist for File Import - Modifiers by Practitioner Category:
- File A: Will add a record with desired values. Note the values.
- File B: Will edit the record created when File A is posted. Note the values.
- The 'Avatar_PM_File_Import_Record_Layouts' will be included in the update zip file.
Steps
- Open "File Import".
- Select the 'Modifiers By Practitioner Category' file type.
- Select the 'Upload New File' action radio button.
- Click [Process].
- Select 'File A'.
- Compile, print and post the file.
- Close the form.
- Open "Modifiers By Practitioner Category".
- Based on the contents of 'File A' select the desired 'Guarantor ID ', 'Program', 'CPT Code ', 'Practitioner Category', and 'Modifier'.
- Click [Print Modifiers].
- Validate the report contents.
- Close the report.
- Close the form.
- Repeat steps 1 - 13 for 'File 'B.
|
Topics
• Modifiers by Practitioner
• File Import
|
Financial Transaction Posting Summary
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Financial Transaction Posting Summary Report
Scenario 1: 'Financial Transaction Posting Summary' Form - Field Validations.
Specific Setup:
- Client A:
- A new client is admitted or an existing client is identified.
- User should have access to the new form 'Financial Transaction Posting Summary'.
Steps
- Set the 'What can I help you find?' input box to “Financial” and click the “Financial Transaction Posting Summary” from the list.
- Validate that the 'Type of Date' text contains “Type of Date.”
- Validate that the 'Type of Date' text is required.
- Validate that the '1st Accounting Period End Date - Type of Date' label contains “Accounting Period End Date” and is not disabled.
- Validate that the '3rd Accounting Period End Date - Type of Date' text is not selected.
- Validate that the '2nd Posting Date - Type of Date' label contains “Posting Date” and is not disabled.
- Validate that the '2nd Posting Date - Type of Date' label is not selected.
- Validate that the '3rd Transaction Date - Type of Date' label contains “Transaction Date” and is not disabled.
- Validate that the '3rd Transaction Date - Type of Date' label is not selected.
- Click 'Accounting Period End Date - Type of Date'.
- Click 'Posting Date - Type of Date'.
- Click 'Transaction Date - Type of Date'.
- Validate that the 28th 'Start Date' text contains “Start Date” and is required.
- Enter any desired date from the past.
- Validate that the 'Start Date' date input box is populated with the entered date value.
- Enter any desired date from the future.
- Validate that the “‘Start Date’ does not allow future dates.” text is displayed.
- Click [OK].
- Validate that the 'Start Date' date input box reverted to the last valid date value entered.
- Validate that the 3rd 'End Date' text contains “End Date” and is required.
- Enter any desired date that is greater than the 'Start Date' value.
- Validate that the 'End Date' date input box is populated with the entered date value.
- Enter any desired date that is lesser than the 'Start Date' value.
- Validate that the 'Start Date must be on or before End Date' text is displayed.
- Click [OK].
- Validate that the 'End Date' date input box reverted to the last valid date value entered.
- Validate that the 'Use Data Export Format' text contains “Use Data Export Format” and is required.
- Validate that the 1st 'Yes - Use Data Export Format' label contains “Yes” and is not disabled.
- Validate that the 2nd 'No - Use Data Export Format' label contains “No” and is not disabled.
- Click 'Yes - Use Data Export Format'.
- Click 'No - Use Data Export Format'.
- Validate that the 11th 'Client ID' text contains “Client ID” and is not required.
- Validate that the 'Client ID' search input box is not disabled.
- Set the 'Client ID' search input box to “Client A” and select from the 'Client ID' list box.
- Validate that the 'Client ID' search input box contains “Client A”
- Validate that the 2nd 'Record Type' text contains “Record Type” and is not required.
- Validate that the 1st 'Adjustments - Record Type' label contains “Adjustments” and is not disabled.
- Validate that the 2nd 'Charges - Record Type' label contains “Charges” and is not disabled.
- Validate that the 3rd 'Payments - Record Type' label contains “Payments” and is not disabled.
- Validate that the 4th 'Transfers - Record Type' label contains “Transfers” and is not disabled.
- Click 1st 'Adjustments - Record Type'.
- Click 2nd 'Charges - Record Type'.
- Click 3rd 'Payments - Record Type'.
- Click 4th 'Transfers - Record Type'.
- Validate that the 4th 'Adjustments - Record Type' text is checked.
- Validate that the 5th 'Charges - Record Type' text is checked.
- Validate that the 6th 'Payments - Record Type' text is checked.
- Validate that the 7th 'Transfers - Record Type' text is checked.
- Verify that the 'Run Compile' button exists and is not disabled.
- Verify that the 'Run Report' button exists and is not disabled.
- Click [Run Report].
- Validate that the “No compiles found.” text is displayed.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Validate that the “Nx Yes No Dialog Body” text contains “Are you sure you want to Close without saving?”
- Click [Yes] and verify that the 'What can I help you find?' input box exists.
Financial Transaction Posting Summary - Run Compile
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Financial Transaction Posting Summary Report
- Financial Transaction Posting Summary - Popup
Scenario 1: 'Financial Transaction Posting Summary Report' - Compile report.
Specific Setup:
- Client A:
- Client is admitted to any desired program.
- The client has an active diagnosis and financial eligibility records.
- Financial eligibility has more than one guarantor. (Here we add three)
- Guarantor 1
- Guarantor 2
- Guarantor 3
- Charges:
- Ten different charges are created for "Client A" for the different services and dates.
- Using any one of the posting forms, multiple Payments, Adjustments, and Transfers are made for "Client A".
Steps
- Set the 'What can I help you find?' input box to “Financial” and click “Financial Transaction Posting Summary” from the list.
- Click [Run Compile]
- Validate that the text contains “The following fields are required:Type of DateStart DateEnd DateUse Data Export Format”.
- Click "Accounting Period End Date" in 'Type of Date'.
- Enter desired values in 'Start Date' and 'End Date'.
- Click "No" in 'Use Data Export Format'.
- Enter "Client A" in 'Client ID' and select the desired value in the search results.
- Validate that the 1st 'Adjustments - Record Type' checkbox is not checked
- Validate the 2nd 'Charges - Record Type' checkbox is not checked
- Validate the 3rd 'Payments - Record Type' checkbox is not checked
- Validate the 4th 'Transfers - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Click [Run Compile] and validate that the label contains “Compile started".
- Click [Run Report]
- Validate that the generated report contains a header, and additional report information specific to the compiled data, and that the column ‘Accounting Period’ is shown in the report.
- Click [Close Report].
- Open the SQL querying tool and run the following query, “SELECT * FROM “SYSTEM”.fin_tran_post_summ_rpt;”
- Validate that there are records showing in the table
- Validate column “PATID” has the value of “Client A”
- Validate column “accounting_period” contains values for all rows and the values are within the Start and End dates entered in the form.
- Close the SQL window and return to the ‘Financial Transaction Posting Summary’ form.
- Click "Posting Date" in 'Type of Date'.
- Enter desired values in 'Start Date' and 'End Date'.
- Click "Yes" in 'Use Data Export Format'.
- Enter "Client A" in 'Client ID' and select the desired value in the search results.
- Click the '3rd Payments - Record Type' checkbox
- Validate that the 1st 'Adjustments - Record Type' checkbox is not checked
- Validate the 2nd 'Charges - Record Type' checkbox is not checked
- Validate the 4th 'Transfers - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Click [Run Compile] and validate that the label contains "Compile started".
- Click [Run Report].
- Validate that the Crystal Report page contains the compiled content.
- Validate that the records are grouped by the service code in the report.
- Validate that the report shows the ‘Record Type(s)’ selected as ‘Transfers’.
- Click [Close Report].
- Open the SQL querying tool and run the specified query.
- Validate that the column “PATID” contains “Client A”.
- Validate that the column “transaction_date” contains values for all the rows and the values are within the entered Start and End date range in the form.
- Click "Transaction Date" in 'Type of Date'.
- Enter desired values in 'Start Date' and 'End Date'.
- Click "No" in 'Use Data Export Format'.
- Leave the 'Client ID' empty.
- Click 4th 'Transfers - Record Type'.
- Validate the 1st 'Adjustments - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Validate the 2nd 'Charges - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Validate the 3rd 'Payments - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Validate the 4th 'Transfers - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Click [Run Compile].
- Validate the label contains “Compile started”.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Validate the text about the compile status exists.
- Click [OK].
- Validate that the Crystal Report page contains the compiled content.
- Validate that the report shows the ‘Record Type(s)’ selected as "Adjustments, Charges, Payments, Transfers".
- Validate the records are grouped by the service code in the report.
- Click [Export].
- Select “Microsoft Excel (XLS)” from the Format Options dropdown list.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Close Report].
- Open the exported .xls file and validate the compiled records with the header and additional report-specific data.
- Open the SQL querying tool and run the specified query.
- Validate there are records showing in the table.
- Validate that the column “PATID” includes all other client IDs including "Client A".
- Validate that the column “transaction_date” values are within the form's entered Start and End dates.
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Verify that the What can I help you find? input box exists.
Financial Transaction Posting Summary - Run Report
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Financial Transaction Posting Summary Report
- Financial Transaction Posting Summary - Popup
Scenario 1: 'Financial Transaction Posting Summary Report' - Compile report.
Specific Setup:
- Client A:
- Client is admitted to any desired program.
- The client has an active diagnosis and financial eligibility records.
- Financial eligibility has more than one guarantor. (Here we add three)
- Guarantor 1
- Guarantor 2
- Guarantor 3
- Charges:
- Ten different charges are created for "Client A" for the different services and dates.
- Using any one of the posting forms, multiple Payments, Adjustments, and Transfers are made for "Client A".
Steps
- Set the 'What can I help you find?' input box to “Financial” and click “Financial Transaction Posting Summary” from the list.
- Click [Run Compile]
- Validate that the text contains “The following fields are required:Type of DateStart DateEnd DateUse Data Export Format”.
- Click "Accounting Period End Date" in 'Type of Date'.
- Enter desired values in 'Start Date' and 'End Date'.
- Click "No" in 'Use Data Export Format'.
- Enter "Client A" in 'Client ID' and select the desired value in the search results.
- Validate that the 1st 'Adjustments - Record Type' checkbox is not checked
- Validate the 2nd 'Charges - Record Type' checkbox is not checked
- Validate the 3rd 'Payments - Record Type' checkbox is not checked
- Validate the 4th 'Transfers - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Click [Run Compile] and validate that the label contains “Compile started".
- Click [Run Report]
- Validate that the generated report contains a header, and additional report information specific to the compiled data, and that the column ‘Accounting Period’ is shown in the report.
- Click [Close Report].
- Open the SQL querying tool and run the following query, “SELECT * FROM “SYSTEM”.fin_tran_post_summ_rpt;”
- Validate that there are records showing in the table
- Validate column “PATID” has the value of “Client A”
- Validate column “accounting_period” contains values for all rows and the values are within the Start and End dates entered in the form.
- Close the SQL window and return to the ‘Financial Transaction Posting Summary’ form.
- Click "Posting Date" in 'Type of Date'.
- Enter desired values in 'Start Date' and 'End Date'.
- Click "Yes" in 'Use Data Export Format'.
- Enter "Client A" in 'Client ID' and select the desired value in the search results.
- Click the '3rd Payments - Record Type' checkbox
- Validate that the 1st 'Adjustments - Record Type' checkbox is not checked
- Validate the 2nd 'Charges - Record Type' checkbox is not checked
- Validate the 4th 'Transfers - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Click [Run Compile] and validate that the label contains "Compile started".
- Click [Run Report].
- Validate that the Crystal Report page contains the compiled content.
- Validate that the records are grouped by the service code in the report.
- Validate that the report shows the ‘Record Type(s)’ selected as ‘Transfers’.
- Click [Close Report].
- Open the SQL querying tool and run the specified query.
- Validate that the column “PATID” contains “Client A”.
- Validate that the column “transaction_date” contains values for all the rows and the values are within the entered Start and End date range in the form.
- Click "Transaction Date" in 'Type of Date'.
- Enter desired values in 'Start Date' and 'End Date'.
- Click "No" in 'Use Data Export Format'.
- Leave the 'Client ID' empty.
- Click 4th 'Transfers - Record Type'.
- Validate the 1st 'Adjustments - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Validate the 2nd 'Charges - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Validate the 3rd 'Payments - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Validate the 4th 'Transfers - Record Type' checkbox is not checked.
- Click [Run Compile].
- Validate the label contains “Compile started”.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Validate the text about the compile status exists.
- Click [OK].
- Validate that the Crystal Report page contains the compiled content.
- Validate that the report shows the ‘Record Type(s)’ selected as "Adjustments, Charges, Payments, Transfers".
- Validate the records are grouped by the service code in the report.
- Click [Export].
- Select “Microsoft Excel (XLS)” from the Format Options dropdown list.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Close Report].
- Open the exported .xls file and validate the compiled records with the header and additional report-specific data.
- Open the SQL querying tool and run the specified query.
- Validate there are records showing in the table.
- Validate that the column “PATID” includes all other client IDs including "Client A".
- Validate that the column “transaction_date” values are within the form's entered Start and End dates.
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Verify that the What can I help you find? input box exists.
|
Topics
• Financial Transaction Posting Summary
|
'Client Merge' process
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: Client Merge - Validate the 'Allow Merging Into Existing Episode' registry setting
Specific Setup:
- Two clients are admitted into existing episodes in the same outpatient programs (Client A, Client B).
Steps
- Access the 'Registry Settings' form.
- Enter "Allow Merging Into Existing Episode" in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Validate the 'Registry Setting' field contains: Avatar PM->System Maintenance->Client Merge->->->Allow Merging Into Existing Episode.
- Enter "Y" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Client Merge' form.
- Select "Client A" in the 'Source Client' field.
- Select "Episode # 1" from the 'Source Client Episode' field.
- Select "Client B" in the 'Target Client' field.
- Validate the 'Create New Episode on Merge' field is displayed.
- Select "No" in the 'Create New Episode On Merge' field.
- Click [File].
- Validate a 'Do you wish to continue with the indicated action?' message is displayed.
- Click [Yes].
- Validate a message stating 'The following episode has been updated for the target client indicated to include data from the source. Episode 1.
- Click [OK] and close the form.
- Access Crystal Reports or other SQL Reporting Tool.
- Create a report using the 'SYSTEM.client_merge_log' SQL table.
- Validate the merged client data is displayed as expected.
- Close the report.
Scenario 2: Client Merge - Validate the 'Allow Merging Of All Client Data Through Single Filing' registry setting
Specific Setup:
- Three clients are admitted into existing episodes in different outpatient programs (Client A, Client B, Client C).
Steps
- Access the 'Registry Settings' form.
- Enter "Allow Merging Of All Client Data" in the 'Limit Registry Settings to the Following Search Criteria' field.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Validate the 'Registry Setting' field contains: Avatar PM->System Maintenance->Client Merge->->->Allow Merging Of All Client Data Through Single Filing.
- Enter "Y" in the 'Registry Setting Value' field.
- Submit the form.
- Access the 'Client Merge' form.
- Select "Client A" in the 'Source Client' field.
- Validate the 'Merge All Client Data Through Single Filing' field is displayed.
- Select "Yes" in the 'Merge All Client Data Through Single Filing' field.
- Select "Client B" in the 'Target Client' field.
- Click [File].
- Validate a "Client Merge" message is displayed stating: Do you wish to continue with the indicated action.
- Click [Yes].
- Validate a "Client Merge" message is displayed stating: All information has been merged into the target client and the source client has been deleted from the system.
- Click [OK].
- Close the form.
- Access Crystal Reports or other SQL Reporting Tool.
- Create a report using the 'SYSTEM.client_merge_log' SQL table.
- Validate the merged client data is displayed as expected.
- Close the report.
|
Topics
n/a
|
Roll-Up Services Definition - Bill component and roll-up services on one claim
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Roll-Up Services Definition
- Electronic Billing
- Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist
- Create Interim Billing Batch File
Scenario 1: Roll-Up Services Definition - Form / Field Validation for new Fields
Specific Setup:
- Service Codes:
- Service Code 1: Roll-Up service code. 'Type of 'Fee' = desired value. Minutes Per Unit = desired value. Note the service code/value, Minutes Per Unit, and 'Covered Charge Category' for the service code.
- Service Code 2: Component service code. 'Type of 'Fee' = desired value, Minutes Per Unit = desired value. Note the service.
- Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance:
- All service codes have a 'Fee', 'UB-04 Revenue Code', and/or 'CPT-4 / HCPCS Code' defined in 'Service Fee/Cross Reference Maintenance'. Note the fees.
Steps
- Open 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Select 'Add' in 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Enter a 'Roll-Up Description'.
- Select a 'Roll-Up Service'.
- Select desired 'Component Services'.
- Select desired 'Required Component Service(s) for Roll-Up to Occur'.
- Select desired 'Component Service Date Rules'.
- Select desired value in 'Is This Roll-Up Services Dependent On Units, Duration, Or None'.
- Select desired 'Date Of Service For Roll-Up Service'.
- Enter data in the remaining required fields, noting the values.
- Validate that the 'Service Start Time For Roll-Up Service' field is available with the 'Time Of First Component Service' option to the 'Roll-Up Services Definition' form.
- Verify the 'Time Of First Component Service' option is unchecked in the 'Service Start Time For Roll-Up Service' field.
- Select the 'Time Of First Component Service' in the Service Start Time For Roll-Up Service' field.
- Verify the new field 'Bill Roll-Up Service, Component Service(s), or Both' exists and is enabled with the below options.
- Roll-Up Service.
- Component Services.
- Both.
- Verify that there is a help text shown when selecting the light bulb.
- Click the [Return To Form] link.
- Verify that the new field 'Force Component Service(s) and Roll-Up Service on the Same Claim' exists and is disabled with the below options.
- Yes.
- No.
- Select 'Roll-Up Service' in 'Bill Roll-Up Service, Component Service(s), or Both'.
- Verify that the 'Force Component Service(s) and Roll-Up Service on the Same Claim' field is disabled.
- Select 'Component Services' in 'Bill Roll-Up Service, Component Service(s), or Both'.
- Verify that the 'Force Component Service(s) and Roll-Up Service on the Same Claim' field is still disabled.
- Select 'Both' in 'Bill Roll-Up Service, Component Service(s), or Both'.
- Verify that now the 'Force Component Service(s) and Roll-Up Service on the Same Claim' field is enabled and required.
- Select 'Yes'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Yes] to return to the form.
- Select 'Edit' in 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Select the same definition.
- Verify the fields retained the submitted values.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No] to return to the form.
- Query the below SQL table and validate that the values added for the new fields are present in the table along with their associated values.
- SYSTEM.rollup_services_def
- Field 1 - bill_rollup_code, bill_rollup_value
- Field 2 - force_same_claim_code, force_same_claim_value
- Close the SQL window.
Scenario 2: Validate the ability to bill component and roll-up services on Same and Different claim(s)-837 Professional.
Specific Setup:
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New code created, or an existing code is identified for the below type:
- Adjustment - "Adj Post Code 1"
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify an individual roll-up service code and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for it.
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify roll-up service definitions, for each of the roll-up service codes and its associated component services.
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Client A:
- The client is admitted to an outpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility - (Guarantor 1) records.
- Make a note on the "Financial Class' of "Guarantor 1".
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 1".
- Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults:
- Add or identify a template, that includes the guarantor used in the Financial Eligibility record of 'Client A".
- Template 1
Steps
Scenario 3: Validate the ability to bill component and roll-up services on Same and Different claim(s)-837 Institutional.
Specific Setup:
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New ones are created or existing codes are identified for the below type,
- Adjustment - "Adj Post Code 1"
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify an individual roll-up service code and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for it.
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify roll-up service definitions, for each of the roll-up service codes and its associated component services.
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Client A:
- The client is admitted to an Inpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility-(Guarantor 1) records.
- Make a note on the "Financial Class' of "Guarantor 1".
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 1".
- Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults:
- Add or identify a template, that includes the guarantor used in the Financial Eligibility record of 'Client A".
- Template 1
Steps
- Open 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Select 'Edit' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select "Rollup Def 1" in 'Existing Roll-Up Definition'.
- Select 'Both' in the 'Bill Roll-Up Service, Component Service(s), or Both' field.
- Verify that the 'Force Component Service(s) and Roll-Up Service on the Same Claim' become enabled and required.
- Select 'Yes' in the 'Force Component Service(s) and Roll-Up Service on the Same Claim' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Verify that the charges for the roll-up component services are displayed in the report.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the 'From Date' and 'Through Date', that cover the services of "Client A".
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field shows "Rollup Def 1" and select it.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the report shows the created Roll-Up services and their component services for "Client A".
- Click [Close Report].
- Select 'Post Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the desired compiled worklist.
- Select "Adj Post Code 1" in 'Default Write Off Posting Code'.
- Click [Post Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up' and that "Adj Post Code 1" was used for each component service.
- Verify that the roll-up service was created.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Close Charges'.
- Select 'Close Charges' in 'Liability Update Or Close Charges'.
- Select the desired Thru Date that covers all the services of "Client A" that require closure.
- Select 'Individual'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the Episode.
- Click [Submit].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up service and verify that is closed and marked as 'UNBILL'.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Create Interim Billing Batch File'.
- Select 'Create Batch'.
- Set the desired value in 'Batch Description'.
- Set the 'From Date' and 'Through Date' that cover the charges of "Client A".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Charge Services'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the below values that are relevant to "Client A", noted in setup.
- Guarantor.
- Program.
- Service Codes.
- Practitioner.
- Click [Process].
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" in 'Select Template'.
- Select '837 Institutional'.
- Set the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field value to "1".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Dollar Services'.
- Select 'No' in 'Suppress Claim Level Adjustments/Service Level Adjustments When Total Is Zero'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Electronic Billing'.
- Select '837-Institutional' in 'Billing Form'.
- Select the financial class of "Guarantor 1" in 'Type Of Bill'.
- Select 'Individual' in 'Individual Or All Guarantors'.
- Select "Guarantor 1".
- Select 'Inpatient' in 'Billing Type'.
- Select 'Sort File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Set a desired value in 'File Description'.
- Select 'Interim Batch' in 'All Clients Or Interim Billing Batch'.
- Select the desired Interim Batch.
- Select 'No' in 'Create Claims'.
- Set the desired date values in 'First Date Of Service To Include' and 'Last Date Of Service To Include date' that includes the services we have for "Client A".
- Select 'All' in 'Include Primary and/or Secondary Billing'.
- Click [Process].
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Dump File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Select 'Print'.
- Select the file in the 'File' field.
- Click [Process].
- Verify that the roll-up service and the roll-up component services are included in the same claim (CLM segment).
- Verify that the 837 Institutional files summarize services (SV2) segments by consecutive days If consecutive-day component services.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" in 'Select Template'.
- Select '837 Institutional'.
- Remove if there is any value in the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select 'Unpost Last Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the desired posted worklist.
- Click [Unpost Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Select 'Edit' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select "Rollup Def 1" in 'Existing Roll-Up Definition'.
- Select 'Both' in the 'Bill Roll-Up Service, Component Service(s), or Both' field.
- Select 'No' in the 'Force Component Service(s) and Roll-Up Service on the Same Claim' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Verify that the component services are reverted to 'Open', and the roll-up service is removed for "Client A".
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the 'From Date' and 'Through Date', that cover the services of "Client A".
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field shows "Rollup Def 1" and select it.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the report shows the created Roll-Up services and their component services for "Client A".
- Click [Close Report].
- Select 'Post Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the desired compiled worklist.
- Select "Adj Post Code 1" in 'Default Write Off Posting Code'.
- Click [Post Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up' and that "Adj Post Code 1" was used for each of the component services.
- Verify that the roll-up service was created.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Close Charges'.
- Select 'Close Charges' in 'Liability Update Or Close Charges'.
- Select the desired Thru Date that covers all the services of "Client A" that require closure.
- Select 'Individual'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the Episode.
- Click [Submit].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up service and verify that is closed and marked as 'UNBILL'.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Create Interim Billing Batch File'.
- Select 'Create Batch'.
- Set the desired value in 'Batch Description'.
- Set the 'From Date' and 'Through Date' that cover the charges of "Client A".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Charge Services'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the below values that are relevant to "Client A", noted in setup.
- Guarantor.
- Program.
- Service Codes.
- Practitioner.
- Click [Process].
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" in 'Select Template'.
- Select '837 Institutional'.
- Set the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field value to "1".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Dollar Services'.
- Select 'No' in 'Suppress Claim Level Adjustments/Service Level Adjustments When Total Is Zero'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Electronic Billing'.
- Select '837-Institutional' in 'Billing Form'.
- Select the financial class of "Guarantor 1" in 'Type Of Bill'.
- Select 'Individual' in 'Individual Or All Guarantors'.
- Select "Guarantor 1".
- Select 'Inpatient' in 'Billing Type'.
- Select 'Sort File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Set a desired value in 'File Description'.
- Select 'Interim Batch' in 'All Clients Or Interim Billing Batch'.
- Select the desired Interim Batch.
- Select 'No' in 'Create Claims'.
- Set the desired date values in 'First Date Of Service To Include' and 'Last Date Of Service To Include date' that includes the services we have for "Client A".
- Select 'All' in 'Include Primary and/or Secondary Billing'.
- Click [Process].
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Dump File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Select 'Print'.
- Select the file in the 'File' field.
- Click [Process].
- Verify that the roll-up parent service and the roll-up component services are included in the file, but they are not included in the same claim. Each service should be on a separate claim.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
Scenario 4: Validate the ability to bill component and roll-up services on same claim with Medical Diagnoses-837 Professional.
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set 'Use Diagnosis Form for Medical Diagnosis Bills' to "Y".
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New ones are created, or existing codes are identified for the below type,
- Adjustment - "Adj Post Code 1"
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify an individual roll-up service code and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for it:
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify roll-up service definitions, for each of the roll-up service codes and its associated component services:
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Client A:
- The client is admitted to an outpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility-(Guarantor 1) records.
- Make a note on the "Financial Class' of "Guarantor 1".
- Diagnosis:
- Identify an active diagnosis.
- Diagnosis 1
- Diagnosis 2
- Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults:
- Add or identify a template which includes the guarantor used in the Financial Eligibility record of 'Client A".
- Template 1.
Steps
Scenario 5: Validate the ability to bill component services only and Roll-Up service only -837 Professional.
Specific Setup:
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New ones are created, or existing codes are identified for the below type:
- Adjustment - "Adj Post Code 1"
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add, or identify an individual roll-up service code and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for it:
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify roll-up service definitions, for each of the roll-up service codes and its associated component services:
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Client A:
- The client is admitted to an outpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility-(Guarantor 1) records.
- Make a note on the "Financial Class' of "Guarantor 1".
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 1".
- Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults:
- Add or identify a template which includes the guarantor used in the Financial Eligibility record of 'Client A".
- Template 1.
Steps
- Open 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Select 'Edit' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select "Rollup Def 1" in 'Existing Roll-Up Definition'.
- Select 'Component Services' in the 'Bill Roll-Up Service, Component Service(s), or Both' field.
- Verify that the 'Force Component Service(s) and Roll-Up Service on the Same Claim' stays disabled and not required.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Verify that the charges for the roll-up component services are displayed.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the 'From Date' and 'Through Date', that cover the services of "Client A".
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field shows "Rollup Def 1" and select it.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the report shows the created Roll-Up services and their component services for "Client A".
- Click [Close Report].
- Select 'Post Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the desired compiled worklist.
- Select "Adj Post Code 1" in 'Default Write Off Posting Code'.
- Click [Post Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up' and that "Adj Post Code 1" was used for each of the component services.
- Verify that the roll-up service was created.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Close Charges'.
- Select 'Close Charges' in 'Liability Update Or Close Charges'.
- Select the desired Thru Date that covers all the services of "Client A" that require closure.
- Select 'Individual'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the Episode.
- Click [Submit].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up service and verify that is closed and marked as 'UNBILL'.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Create Interim Billing Batch File'.
- Select 'Create Batch'.
- Set the desired value in 'Batch Description'.
- Set the 'From Date' and 'Through Date' that cover the charges of "Client A".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Charge Services'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the below values that are relevant to "Client A", noted in setup.
- Guarantor.
- Program.
- Service Codes.
- Practitioner.
- Click [Process].
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" in 'Select Template'.
- Select '837 Professional'.
- Set the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field value to "1".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Dollar Services'.
- Select 'No' in 'Suppress Claim Level Adjustments/Service Level Adjustments When Total Is Zero'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Electronic Billing'.
- Select '837-Professional' in 'Billing Form'.
- Select the financial class of "Guarantor 1" in 'Type Of Bill'.
- Select 'Individual' in 'Individual Or All Guarantors'.
- Select "Guarantor 1".
- Select 'Outpatient' in 'Billing Type'.
- Select 'Sort File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Set a desired value in 'File Description'.
- Select 'Interim Batch' in 'All Clients Or Interim Billing Batch'.
- Select desired Interim Batch.
- Select 'No' in 'Create Claims'.
- Set the desired date values in 'First Date Of Service To Include' and 'Last Date Of Service To Include date' that includes the services we have for "Client A".
- Select 'All' in 'Include Primary and/or Secondary Billing'.
- Click [Process].
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Dump File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Select 'Print'.
- Select the file in the 'File' field.
- Click [Process].
- Verify that the dump file generated has only the roll-up component services, but not the roll-up parent service.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" in 'Select Template'.
- Select '837 Professional'.
- Remove if there is any value in the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Repeat 'Electronic Billing' steps and validations.
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select 'Unpost Last Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the worklist posted above.
- Click [Unpost Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Select 'Edit' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select "Rollup Def 1" in 'Existing Roll-Up Definition'.
- Select 'Roll-Up Service' in the 'Bill Roll-Up Service, Component Service(s), or Both' field.
- Verify that the 'Force Component Service(s) and Roll-Up Service on the Same Claim' stays disabled and not required.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Verify that the component services are reverted to 'Open' and the roll-up service is removed.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the 'From Date' and 'Through Date', that cover the services of "Client A".
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field shows "Rollup Def 1" and select it.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the report shows the created Roll-Up services and their component services for "Client A".
- Click [Close Report].
- Select 'Post Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the desired compiled worklist compiled.
- Select "Adj Post Code 1" in 'Default Write Off Posting Code'.
- Click [Post Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up' and that "Adj Post Code 1" was used for each of the component services.
- Verify that the roll-up service was created.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Close Charges'.
- Select 'Close Charges' in 'Liability Update Or Close Charges'.
- Select the desired Thru Date that covers all the services of "Client A" that require closure.
- Select 'Individual'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the Episode.
- Click [Submit].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up service and verify that is closed and marked as 'UNBILL'.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Create Interim Billing Batch File'.
- Select 'Create Batch'.
- Set the desired value in 'Batch Description'.
- Set the 'From Date' and 'Through Date' that cover the charges of "Client A".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Charge Services'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the below values that are relevant to "Client A", noted in setup.
- Guarantor.
- Program.
- Service Codes.
- Practitioner.
- Click [Process].
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" in 'Select Template'.
- Select '837 Professional'.
- Set the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field value to "1".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Dollar Services'.
- Select 'No' in 'Suppress Claim Level Adjustments/Service Level Adjustments When Total Is Zero'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Electronic Billing'.
- Select '837-Professional' in 'Billing Form'.
- Select the financial class of "Guarantor 1" in 'Type Of Bill'.
- Select 'Individual' in 'Individual Or All Guarantors'.
- Select "Guarantor 1".
- Select 'Outpatient' in 'Billing Type'.
- Select 'Sort File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Set a desired value in 'File Description'.
- Select 'Interim Batch' in 'All Clients Or Interim Billing Batch'.
- Select the desired Interim Batch.
- Select 'No' in 'Create Claims'.
- Set the desired date values in 'First Date Of Service To Include' and 'Last Date Of Service To Include date' that includes the services we have for "Client A".
- Select 'All' in 'Include Primary and/or Secondary Billing'.
- Click [Process].
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Dump File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Select 'Print'.
- Select the file in the 'File' field.
- Click [Process].
- Verify that only the roll-up parent service is included in the file, but not the roll-up component services.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
Scenario 6: Validate the ability to bill component services only and Roll-Up service only -837 Institutional.
Specific Setup:
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New codes are created, or existing codes are identified for the below type,
- Adjustment - "Adj Post Code 1".
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify an individual roll-up service code and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for it:
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify roll-up service definitions, for each of the roll-up service codes and its associated component services:
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Client A:
- The client is admitted to an Inpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility-(Guarantor 1) records.
- Make a note on the "Financial Class' of "Guarantor 1".
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 1".
- Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults:
- Add or identify a template which includes the guarantor used in the Financial Eligibility record of 'Client A".
- Template 1.
Steps
- Open 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Select 'Edit' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select "Rollup Def 1" in 'Existing Roll-Up Definition'.
- Select 'Component Services' in the 'Bill Roll-Up Service, Component Service(s), or Both' field.
- Verify that the 'Force Component Service(s) and Roll-Up Service on the Same Claim' stays disabled and not required.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Verify that the charges for the roll-up component services are displayed.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the 'From Date' and 'Through Date', that cover the services of "Client A".
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field shows "Rollup Def 1" and select it.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the report shows the created Roll-Up services and their component services for "Client A".
- Click [Close Report].
- Select 'Post Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the desired compiled worklist.
- Select "Adj Post Code 1" in 'Default Write Off Posting Code'.
- Click [Post Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up' and that "Adj Post Code 1" was used for each of the component services.
- Verify that the roll-up service was created.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Close Charges'.
- Select 'Close Charges' in 'Liability Update Or Close Charges'.
- Select the desired Thru Date that covers all the services of "Client A" that require closure.
- Select 'Individual'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the Episode.
- Click [Submit].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up service and verify that is closed and marked as 'UNBILL'.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Create Interim Billing Batch File'.
- Select 'Create Batch'.
- Set the desired value in 'Batch Description'.
- Set the 'From Date' and 'Through Date' that cover the charges of "Client A".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Charge Services'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the below values that are relevant to "Client A", noted in setup:
- Guarantor.
- Program.
- Service Codes.
- Practitioner.
- Click [Process].
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" in 'Select Template'.
- Select '837 Institutional'.
- Set the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field value to "1".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Dollar Services'.
- Select 'No' in 'Suppress Claim Level Adjustments/Service Level Adjustments When Total Is Zero'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Electronic Billing'.
- Select '837-Institutional' in 'Billing Form'.
- Select the financial class of "Guarantor 1" in 'Type Of Bill'.
- Select 'Individual' in 'Individual Or All Guarantors'.
- Select "Guarantor 1".
- Select 'Inpatient' in 'Billing Type'.
- Select 'Sort File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Set a desired value in 'File Description'.
- Select 'Interim Batch' in 'All Clients Or Interim Billing Batch'.
- Select the desired Interim Batch.
- Select 'No' in 'Create Claims'.
- Set the desired date values in 'First Date Of Service To Include' and 'Last Date Of Service To Include date' that includes the services we have for "Client A".
- Select 'All' in 'Include Primary and/or Secondary Billing'.
- Click [Process].
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Dump File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Select 'Print'.
- Select the file in the 'File' field.
- Click [Process].
- Verify that the dump file generated has only the roll-up component services, but not the roll-up parent service.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" in 'Select Template'.
- Select '837 Institutional'.
- Remove if there is any value in the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Repeat 'Electronic Billing' steps and validations.
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select 'Unpost Last Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the desired posted worklist.
- Click [Unpost Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Select 'Edit' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select "Rollup Def 1" in 'Existing Roll-Up Definition'.
- Select 'Roll-Up Service' in the 'Bill Roll-Up Service, Component Service(s), or Both' field.
- Verify that the 'Force Component Service(s) and Roll-Up Service on the Same Claim' stays disabled and not required.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Verify that the component services are reverted to 'Open', and the roll-up service is removed.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the 'From Date' and 'Through Date', that cover the services of "Client A".
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field shows "Rollup Def 1" and select it.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the report shows the created Roll-Up services and their component services for "Client A".
- Click [Close Report].
- Select 'Post Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the desired compiled worklist.
- Select "Adj Post Code 1" in 'Default Write Off Posting Code'.
- Click [Post Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up' and that "Adj Post Code 1" was used for each of the component services.
- Verify that the roll-up service was created.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Close Charges'.
- Select 'Close Charges' in 'Liability Update Or Close Charges'.
- Select the desired Thru Date that covers all the services of "Client A" that require closure.
- Select 'Individual'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the Episode.
- Click [Submit].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up service and verify that is closed and marked as 'UNBILL'.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Create Interim Billing Batch File'.
- Select 'Create Batch'.
- Set the desired value in 'Batch Description'.
- Set the 'From Date' and 'Through Date' that cover the charges of "Client A".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Charge Services'.
- Search and select "Client A" in 'Client ID'.
- Select the below values that are relevant to "Client A", noted in setup.
- Guarantor.
- Program.
- Service Codes.
- Practitioner.
- Click [Process].
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" in 'Select Template'.
- Select '837 Institutional'.
- Set the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field value to "1".
- Select 'Yes' in 'Include Zero Dollar Services'.
- Select 'No' in 'Suppress Claim Level Adjustments/Service Level Adjustments When Total Is Zero'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Electronic Billing'.
- Select '837-Institutional' in 'Billing Form'.
- Select the financial class of "Guarantor 1" in 'Type Of Bill'.
- Select 'Individual' in 'Individual Or All Guarantors'.
- Select "Guarantor 1".
- Select 'Inpatient' in 'Billing Type'.
- Select 'Sort File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Set a desired value in 'File Description'.
- Select 'Interim Batch' in 'All Clients Or Interim Billing Batch'.
- Select the desired Interim Batch.
- Select 'No' in 'Create Claims'.
- Set the desired date values in 'First Date Of Service To Include' and 'Last Date Of Service To Include date' that includes the services we have for "Client A".
- Select 'All' in 'Include Primary and/or Secondary Billing'.
- Click [Process].
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Dump File' in 'Billing Options'.
- Select 'Print'.
- Select the file in the 'File' field.
- Click [Process].
- Verify that only the roll-up parent service is included in the file, but not the roll-up component services.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
Scenario 7: Validate the ability to bill component and roll-up services on same claim with Medical Diagnoses-837 Institutional.
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set 'Use Diagnosis Form for Medical Diagnosis Bills' to "Y".
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New codes are created, or existing codes are identified for the below type:
- Adjustment - "Adj Post Code 1"
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify an individual roll-up service code and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for it:
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify roll-up service definitions, for each of the roll-up service codes and its associated component services"
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Client A:
- The client is admitted to an Inpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility-(Guarantor 1) records.
- Make a note on the "Financial Class' of "Guarantor 1".
- Diagnosis:
- Identify an active diagnosis.
- Diagnosis 1
- Diagnosis 2
- Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults:
- Add or identify a template which includes the guarantor used in the Financial Eligibility record of 'Client A".
- Template 1.
Steps
Scenario 8: File Import - Roll-Up Services Definition - Validations.
Specific Setup:
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New codes are created, or existing codes are identified for the below type:
- Adjustment - "Adj Post Code 1".
- Payment - "Pay Post Code 1".
- Transfer - "Trans Post Code 1".
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify an individual roll-up service code and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for it.
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- File Import:
- Create the below .txt file(s) to have the data that we can validate against the 'File Import' feature for 'Roll-Up Services Definition', as mentioned below,
- File 1:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Invalid value for field 55 and Invalid value for field 56.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 2:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(Both)' for field 55 and field 56 is left blank.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 3:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Invalid value for field 57.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 4:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(No - transfer to next guarantor)' for field 57 and field 58 ('Transfer Code for Component Services') is left blank.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 5:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(No - transfer to next guarantor)' for field 57 and field 58 ('Transfer Code for Component Services') has a valid ADJUSTMENT posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 6:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(No - transfer to next guarantor)' for field 57 and field 58 ('Transfer Code for Component Services') has a valid PAYMENT posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 7:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(No - transfer to next guarantor)' for field 57 and field 58 ('Transfer Code for Component Services') has an INVALID posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 8:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- The value of field 57 is anything other than '3' and field 58 has a valid TRANSFER posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 9:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- The value of field 57 is '1'.
- Field 59 ('Write Off Code for Component Services") has a valid ADJUSTMENT posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 10:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- The value of field 57 is '1'.
- Field 59 ('Write Off Code for Component Services") has a valid PAYMENT posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 11:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- The value of field 57 is '1'.
- Field 59 ('Write Off Code for Component Services") has a valid TRANSFER posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 12:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- The value of field 57 is '1'.
- Field 59 ('Write Off Code for Component Services") has an INVALID posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 13:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Field 57 ('Write Off Component Services') has the value '2' or '3' and a valid ADJUSTMENT posting code for field 59.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 14:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(Both)' for field 55 and valid dictionary value for field 56.
- Value '1-(Yes)' for field 57 and valid ADJUSTMENT posting code for field 59.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 15:
- Field 1 value set as "2".
- Field 2 value set as the Valid roll-up ID created in the above step using "File 14".
- Value '3-(Both)' for field 55 and valid dictionary value for field 56.
- Value '2-(No - Keep Liability With Current Guarantor)' for field 57 and No values entered for field 59.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 16:
- Field 1 value set as "2".
- Field 2 value set as the Valid roll-up ID created in the above step using "File 14".
- Value '3-(Both)' for field 55 and valid dictionary value for field 56.
- Value '3-(No - Transfer to Next Guarantor)' for field 57 and valid TRANSFER code entered for field 58.
- No values were entered for field 59.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 17:
- Field 1 value set as "3".
- Use all other field values the same as in "File 15".
Steps
Compile Roll-Up Services Worklist
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist
Scenario 1: Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Worklist - Validate the run-time roll-up data stored in table.
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set the "Allow Multiple Roll-Ups" registry setting to have the value "Y".
- Set the "Enable New Practitioner Numbers By Guarantor and Program Form" so that is set to "Y".
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add, or identify an individual roll-up service code and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services:
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify a roll-up service definition, for the roll-up service code and its associated component services:
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Client A:
- The client is an active client.
- The client has an active diagnosis record.
- The client has a Financial Eligibility record.
- Practitioner Numbers by Guarantor and Program:
- Identify a provider who will be the rendering provider of the roll-up component service(s),
- Practitioner 1.
- Fill out the 'Supervising Practitioner' field with a different provider,
- Practitioner 2.
- Client Charge Input:
- Charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates.
- The rendering provider that was updated in the 'Practitioner Numbers by Guarantor and Program' form will be used as the practitioner for the charges.
Steps
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the 'From Date' and 'Through Date', that cover the services of "Client A".
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field shows "Rollup Def 1".
- Select "Rollup Def 1" in the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the report shows the created Roll-Up service and its component services.
- Click [Close Report].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Query the table "rollup_services_worklist" and validate that values are showing correctly with the compiled worklist data for the following columns:
- data_entry_utc
- data_entry_time
- data_entry_time_j
- data_entry_offset
- data_entry_timezone_short
- supervising_practitioner
- in_other_rollups_code
- in_other_rollups_value
- Verify that the column "supervising_practitioner" shows "Practitioner 2".
- Close the SQL window and go back to the NX window.
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the 'From Date' and 'Through Date', that cover the services of "Client A".
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field shows "Rollup Def 1".
- Select "Rollup Def 1" in the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Validate that the warning popup shows saying "A compiled roll-up already exists for a selected rule. Continuing will overwrite this compile. Are you sure you want to continue?".
- Click [Yes].
- Click [OK].
- Select 'Post Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the desired compiled worklist.
- Validate that the 'Default Write Off Posting Code' field is enabled and required at this point.
- Select the desired adjustment code from the 'Default Write Off Posting Code' field.
- Click [Post Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Query the table "rollup_services_worklist" and validate that values are showing correctly with the posted worklist data for the following columns:
- data_entry_utc
- data_entry_time
- data_entry_time_j
- data_entry_offset
- data_entry_timezone_short
- supervising_practitioner
- in_other_rollups_code
- in_other_rollups_value
- Close the SQL window.
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select 'Unpost Last Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the desired compiled worklist.
- Click [Unpost Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Query the table "rollup_services_worklist" and validate that values are showing correctly with the un-posted worklist data for the following columns:
- data_entry_utc
- data_entry_time
- data_entry_time_j
- data_entry_offset
- data_entry_timezone_short
- supervising_practitioner
- in_other_rollups_code
- in_other_rollups_value
- Close the SQL window.
Roll-Up Services Definition - Write-off or Transfer Roll-up Component Services
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Roll-Up Services Definition
- Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist
- Quick Billing Rule Definition
- Quick Billing
Scenario 1: 'Roll-Up Services Definition' - Validate the new Registry Setting - 'Specify Write Off Posting Code In 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
Specific Setup:
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New ones are created, or existing codes are identified for the below types,
- Payment - "Pay Post Code 1"
- Transfer - "Trans Post Code 1"
- Adjustment - "Adj Post Code 1"
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify an individual roll-up service code and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services.
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
Steps
- Open 'Registry Settings'.
- Search for 'Specify Write Off Posting Code In 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Verify that the value of the registry setting is set to "N" (disabled) by default.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [OK].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Verify that there are two new fields near the bottom of the form,
- 'Write Off Component Services'.
- 'Transfer Code for Component Services'.
- Verify that both the new fields are disabled.
- Validate that the field 'Write Off Code for Component Services' does not exists.
- Click [Discard].
- Open 'Registry Settings'.
- Search for 'Specify Write Off Posting Code In 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Set the value of the registry setting to "Y".
- Click [Submit].
- Click [OK].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Verify the new field 'Write Off Code for Component Services' exists near the bottom.
- Click the help light bulb message for the 'Write Off Code for Component Services' field.
- Review the message.
- Click [Return To Form].
- Select 'Add' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select "Rollup 1" as the 'Roll-Up Service'.
- Select "Comp 1(a)", and "Comp 1(b)" as the 'Component Services'.
- Enter/ Select all the needed values.
- Verify that the 'Write Off Component Services' field and its options are enabled:
- 'Yes'.
- 'No - Keep Liability With Current Guarantor'.
- 'No - Transfer to Next Guarantor'.
- Verify that the 'Transfer Code for Component Services' field is disabled.
- Verify that the 'Write Off Code For Component Services' field is disabled.
- Select 'Yes' in the 'Write Off Component Services' field.
- Verify that the 'Write Off Code For Component Services' field is enabled.
- Verify that the list of available posting codes in the 'Write Off Code for Component Services' field includes only 'Adjustment' type posting codes as defined in the 'Posting/Adjustment Codes Definition' form.
- Select 'No - Keep Liability With Current Guarantor' in the 'Write Off Component Services' field.
- Verify that the 'Write Off Code For Component Services' field is disabled.
- Verify that the 'Transfer Code for Component Services' field is disabled.
- Select 'No - Transfer to Next Guarantor' in the 'Write Off Component Services' field.
- Verify that the 'Write Off Code For Component Services' field is disabled.
- Verify that the 'Transfer Code for Component Services' field is enabled and required.
- Verify that the list of available posting codes in the 'Transfer Code for Component Services' field includes only 'Transfer' type posting codes as defined in the 'Posting/Adjustment Codes Definition' form.
- Select 'Yes' in the 'Write Off Component Services' field.
- Select "Adj Post Code 1" from the 'Write Off Code For Component Services' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Yes].
- Select 'Edit' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select the roll-up definition created in step 28 in 'Existing Roll-Up Definition'.
- Verify the below fields are appropriately populated with the values entered in the above steps:
- 'Write Off Component Services'.
- 'Write Off Code For Component Services'.
- 'Transfer Code for Component Services'.
- Close the form.
- Query the 'rollup_services_def' table for the definition created in step 28 and validate that the below new fields are present in the table along with their associated values.
- write_off_comp_svc_code,
- write_off_comp_svc_value,
- transfer_posting_code,
- transfer_post_code_value,
- write_off_posting_code,
- write_off_post_code_value.
- Close the SQL Query window.
Scenario 2: Validate Write Off Posting Code for 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'- Individual/Group definitions.
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set the "Specify Write Off Posting Code in 'Roll-Up Services Definition'" registry setting to have the value "Y".
- Set the "Allow Roll-Up Rule Selection During Compile" to have the value '1' or the value '1&2'.
- Remove the value if any, from the 'Default Write Off Posting Code' registry setting.
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New ones are created, or existing codes are identified for the below type:
- Adjustment
- Adj Post Code 1
- Adj Post Code 2
- Adj Post Code 3
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify two individual roll-up service codes and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for each:
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Rollup 2
- Comp 2(a)
- Comp 2(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify roll-up service definitions, for each of the roll-up service codes and its associated component services:
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Rollup Def 2
- Rollup 2
- Comp 2(a)
- Comp 2(b)
- Roll-Up Group Definition:
- Using the 'Roll-Up Group Definition' section of the 'Roll-Up Services Definition' form, create a new roll-up group that includes the two roll-up definitions created earlier:
- Rollup Group Def 1
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup Def 2
- Client A:
- The client is admitted to an inpatient/ outpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility records.
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 1".
- Client B:
- The client is admitted to an inpatient/ outpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility records.
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 2".
Steps
Scenario 3: Validating the Write Off Posting Code for 'Quick Billing'
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set the "Specify Write Off Posting Code in 'Roll-Up Services Definition'" registry setting to have the value "Y".
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New ones are created, or existing codes are identified for the below type:
- Adjustment
- Adj Post Code 1
- Adj Post Code 2
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify two individual roll-up service codes and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for each:
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Rollup 2
- Comp 2(a)
- Comp 2(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify roll-up service definitions, for each of the roll-up service codes and its associated component services:
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Set 'Yes' for the 'Write Off Component Services' field.
- Select "Adj Post Code 2" in the 'Write Off Code for Component Services' field.
- Rollup Def 2
- Rollup 2
- Comp 2(a)
- Comp 2(b)
- Set 'Yes' for the 'Write Off Component Services' field.
- Leave the 'Write Off Code for Component Services' field EMPTY.
- Client A:
- The client is admitted to an inpatient/ outpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility records.
- The client's Guarantor, Financial class, Treatment setting, and Program are noted for validation.
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 1".
- Client B:
- The client is admitted to an inpatient/ outpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility records.
- The client's Guarantor, Financial class, Treatment setting, and Program are noted for validation.
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 2".
Steps
- Open 'Registry Settings'.
- Search for 'Execute Roll-Up Prior To Quick Billing'.
- Click [View Registry Settings].
- Select 'Execute Roll-Up Prior To Quick Billing Registry Setting Value:'.
- Set the registry setting value to "Adj Post Code 1".
- Click [Submit].
- Click [OK].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Quick Billing Rule Definition'.
- Select 'Add New'.
- Set any desired value for 'Rule Description'.
- Select the Roll-up and the Component services in the 'Service Codes' field:
- "Rollup 1"
- "Comp 1(a)"
- "Comp 1(b)"
- "Rollup 2"
- "Comp 2(a)"
- "Comp 2(b)"
- Select all the required values that are relevant to "Client A" and "Client B" from the setup.
- Select the roll-up definitions from the setup in 'Roll-Up Definitions To Include' field:
- "Rollup Def 1"
- "Rollup Def 2"
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Verify that the charges for the roll-up component services are showing for "Client A".
- Click [X].
- Click [Yes].
- Run the ledger report for "Client B"
- Verify that the charges for the roll-up component services are showing for "Client A".
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Quick Billing'.
- Select 'Add New'.
- Select the 'First Date Of Service To Include' and 'Last Date Of Service To Include', that cover the services of "Client A" and "Client B".
- Select the Quick Billing rule created in step 11 in the 'Billing Rule To Execute' field.
- Select the needed tasks in 'Quick Billing Tasks to Execute'. (Minimum selections should be made as listed below)
- Create Batch.
- Close Charges.
- Select the desired value for 'Date Of Claim'.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [OK].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up' and that "Adj Post Code 2" was used for each of the component services.
- Verify that the roll-up service is created for "Client A".
- Click [X].
- Click [Yes].
- Run the ledger report for "Client B"
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up' and that "Adj Post Code 1" was used for each of the component services.
- Verify that the roll-up service is created for "Client B".
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
Scenario 4: Validating Posting Roll-Ups Without Write Off or Transfer of Component Services
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set the "Specify Write Off Posting Code in 'Roll-Up Services Definition'" registry setting to have the value "Y".
- Set the "Allow Roll-Up Rule Selection During Compile" to have the value '1' or the value '1&2'.
- Remove the value if any, from the 'Default Write Off Posting Code' registry setting.
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New ones are created or existing codes are identified for the below type:
- Adjustment
- Adj Post Code 1
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify two individual roll-up service codes and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for each:
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Rollup 2
- Comp 2(a)
- Comp 2(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify roll-up service definitions, for each of the roll-up service codes and its associated component services:
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Rollup Def 2
- Rollup 2
- Comp 2(a)
- Comp 2(b)
- Client A:
- The client is admitted to an inpatient/ outpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility records.
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 1".
- Client B:
- The client is admitted to an inpatient/ outpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility records.
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 2".
Steps
- Open 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Select 'Edit' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select "Rollup Def 1" in 'Existing Roll-Up Definition'.
- Select 'No - Keep Liability With Current Guarantor' in the 'Write Off Component Services' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Yes].
- Select 'Edit' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select "Rollup Def 2" in 'Existing Roll-Up Definition'.
- Select 'Yes' in the 'Write Off Component Services' field.
- Leave the 'Write Off Code For Component Services' field blank.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A".
- Verify that the charges for the roll-up component services are displayed.
- Click [X].
- Click [Yes].
- Run the ledger report for "Client B".
- Verify that the charges for the roll-up component services are displayed.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the 'From Date' and 'Through Date', that cover the services of "Client A" and "Client B".
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field shows "Rollup Def 1" and "Rollup Def 2".
- Select both definitions in the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the report shows the created Roll-Up services and their component services for both "Client A" and "Client B".
- Click [Close Report].
- Select 'Post Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the worklist compiled in step 26.
- Select "Adj Post Code 1" in 'Default Write Off Posting Code'.
- Click [Post Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A".
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up'.
- Verify that there are no adjustments created for the component services.
- Verify that the roll-up service is created.
- Click [X].
- Click [Yes].
- Run the ledger report for "Client B"
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up'.
- Verify that adjustments were posted as expected for the component services using "Adj Post Code 1".
- Verify that the roll-up service was created.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select 'Unpost Last Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the worklist posted in step 34.
- Click [Unpost Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Verify that the component services are reverted to 'Open', the roll-up charges are removed, and none of the component services are marked 'roll-up'.
- Click [X].
- Click [Yes].
- Run the ledger report for "Client B"
- Verify that the component services are reverted to 'Open', the roll-up charges are removed, all adjustments are removed, and none of the component services are marked 'roll-up'.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
Scenario 5: Validating Posting Roll-Ups and Transferring Component Service Liability to Next Guarantor
Specific Setup:
- Registry Settings:
- Set the "Specify Write Off Posting Code in 'Roll-Up Services Definition'" registry setting to have the value "Y".
- Set the "Allow Roll-Up Rule Selection During Compile" to have the value '1' or the value '1&2'.
- Remove the value if any, from the 'Default Write Off Posting Code' registry setting.
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New ones are created, or existing codes are identified for the below types:
- Transfer - "Trans Post Code 1"
- Adjustment - "Adj Post Code 1"
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify two individual roll-up service codes and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for each:
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Rollup 2
- Comp 2(a)
- Comp 2(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify roll-up service definitions, for each of the roll-up service codes and its associated component services:
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Rollup Def 2
- Rollup 2
- Comp 2(a)
- Comp 2(b)
- Client A:
- The client is admitted to an inpatient/ outpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility records.
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 1".
- Client B:
- The client is admitted to an inpatient/ outpatient program.
- The client has active Diagnosis and Financial Eligibility records.
- The charges are created for the roll-up component services on various dates, for "Rollup 2".
Steps
- Open 'Roll-Up Services Definition'.
- Select 'Edit' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select "Rollup Def 1" in 'Existing Roll-Up Definition'.
- Select 'No - Keep Liability With Current Guarantor' in the 'Write Off Component Services' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [Yes].
- Select 'Edit' in the 'Add/Edit/Delete Roll-Up Service Definition' field.
- Select "Rollup Def 2" in 'Existing Roll-Up Definition'.
- Select 'No - Transfer to Next Guarantor' in the 'Write Off Component Services' field.
- Select "Trans Post Code 1" in the 'Transfer Code for Component Services' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Verify that the charges for the roll-up component services are displayed.
- Click [X].
- Click [Yes].
- Run the ledger report for "Client B"
- Verify that the charges for the roll-up component services are displayed.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the 'From Date' and 'Through Date', that cover the services of "Client A" and "Client B".
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field shows "Rollup Def 1" and "Rollup Def 2".
- Select both definitions in the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the report shows the created Roll-Up services and their component services for both "Client A" and "Client B".
- Click [Close Report].
- Select 'Post Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the worklist compiled in step 26.
- Select "Adj Post Code 1" in 'Default Write Off Posting Code'.
- Click [Post Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up'.
- Verify that there are no adjustments created for the component services.
- Verify that the roll-up service was created.
- Click [X].
- Click [Yes].
- Run the ledger report for "Client B"
- Review the roll-up component services and verify that they are marked as 'Roll-Up'.
- Verify that the transfers were posted for the component services and that "Trans Post Code 1" was used for each of the component services.
- Verify that the roll-up service was created.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select 'Unpost Last Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the worklist posted in step 34.
- Click [Unpost Worklist].
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Run the ledger report for "Client A"
- Verify that the component services are reverted to 'Open', and the roll-up service is removed.
- Click [X].
- Click [Yes].
- Run the ledger report for "Client B"
- Verify that all the transfers are removed, and none of the component services are marked 'roll-up'.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
Scenario 6: File Import - Roll-Up Services Definition - Validations.
Specific Setup:
- Posting/Adjustment Code Definition:
- New codes are created, or existing codes are identified for the below type:
- Adjustment - "Adj Post Code 1".
- Payment - "Pay Post Code 1".
- Transfer - "Trans Post Code 1".
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify an individual roll-up service code and at least two service codes that will be considered as the component services for it.
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- File Import:
- Create the below .txt file(s) to have the data that we can validate against the 'File Import' feature for 'Roll-Up Services Definition', as mentioned below,
- File 1:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Invalid value for field 55 and Invalid value for field 56.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 2:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(Both)' for field 55 and field 56 is left blank.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 3:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Invalid value for field 57.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 4:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(No - transfer to next guarantor)' for field 57 and field 58 ('Transfer Code for Component Services') is left blank.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 5:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(No - transfer to next guarantor)' for field 57 and field 58 ('Transfer Code for Component Services') has a valid ADJUSTMENT posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 6:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(No - transfer to next guarantor)' for field 57 and field 58 ('Transfer Code for Component Services') has a valid PAYMENT posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 7:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(No - transfer to next guarantor)' for field 57 and field 58 ('Transfer Code for Component Services') has an INVALID posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 8:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- The value of field 57 is anything other than '3' and field 58 has a valid TRANSFER posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 9:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- The value of field 57 is '1'.
- Field 59 ('Write Off Code for Component Services") has a valid ADJUSTMENT posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 10:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- The value of field 57 is '1'.
- Field 59 ('Write Off Code for Component Services") has a valid PAYMENT posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 11:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- The value of field 57 is '1'.
- Field 59 ('Write Off Code for Component Services") has a valid TRANSFER posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 12:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- The value of field 57 is '1'.
- Field 59 ('Write Off Code for Component Services") has an INVALID posting code.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 13:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Field 57 ('Write Off Component Services') has the value '2' or '3' and a valid ADJUSTMENT posting code for field 59.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 14:
- Field 1 value set as "1".
- Value '3-(Both)' for field 55 and valid dictionary value for field 56.
- Value '1-(Yes)' for field 57 and valid ADJUSTMENT posting code for field 59.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 15:
- Field 1 value set as "2".
- Field 2 value set as the Valid roll-up ID created in the above step using "File 14".
- Value '3-(Both)' for field 55 and valid dictionary value for field 56.
- Value '2-(No - Keep Liability With Current Guarantor)' for field 57 and No values entered for field 59.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 16:
- Field 1 value set as "2".
- Field 2 value set as the Valid roll-up ID created in the above step using "File 14".
- Value '3-(Both)' for field 55 and valid dictionary value for field 56.
- Value '3-(No - Transfer to Next Guarantor)' for field 57 and valid TRANSFER code entered for field 58.
- No values were entered for field 59.
- All other needed fields with valid values.
- File 17:
- Field 1 value set as "3".
- Use all other field values the same as in "File 15".
Steps
Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist - Compile Roll-Up Group
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Client Charge Input
- Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist
Scenario 1: Validate 'Roll-Up-Compile Report' generated with the correct data for both Individual and Group definitions.
Specific Setup:
- Registry settings:
- Set the "Allow Roll-Up Rule Selection During Compile" registry setting to have the value "1&2".
- Service Codes:
- Using the 'Service Codes' form add or identify two individual roll-up service codes and at least two service codes that will be considered component services to each roll-up service code.
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Rollup 2
- Comp 2(a)
- Comp 2(b)
- Roll-Up Services Definition:
- Add or identify two different roll-up service definitions, one for each of the two roll-up service codes and their associated component services.
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup 1
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Rollup Def 2
- Rollup 2
- Comp 2(a)
- Comp 2(b)
- Roll-Up Group Definition:
- Using the 'Roll-Up Group Definition' section of the 'Roll-Up Services Definition' form, create a new roll-up group that includes the two roll-up definitions created earlier.
- Rollup Group Def 1
- Rollup Def 1
- Rollup Def 2
- Client A:
- The client is admitted to an inpatient/ outpatient program.
- The client has an active diagnosis record.
- The client has the Financial Eligibility record.
Steps
- Open 'Client Charge Input'.
- For "Client A" add several days of charges for each of the roll-up component services from the Setup.
- Comp 1(a)
- Comp 1(b)
- Comp 2(a)
- Comp 2(b)
- Open 'Client Ledger'.
- Verify that the charges for the roll-up component services are showing for "Client A".
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Set the 'Through Date' to today's date by clicking 'T'.
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Definitions' field shows the below Roll-Up definitions,
- Rollup Def 1.
- Rollup Def 2.
- Select both the definitions used above.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Verify the "Compile complete" message is received.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the report contains the roll-up services that are created during the compile process along with the component services.
- Close the report.
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Set the 'Through Date' to today's date by clicking 'T'.
- Verify that the 'Roll-Up Group' field shows the below Roll-Up groups:
- Rollup Group Def 1.
- Select the group from Step 21.
- Click [Compile Worklist].
- Verify that the alert message displays: "A compiled roll-up already exists for a selected rule. Continuing will overwrite this compile. Are you sure you want to continue?".
- Click [Yes].
- Verify the "Compile complete" message is received.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Run Report].
- Verify that the report contains the roll-up services created during the compile process and the component services for both Roll-Up Definitions.
- Close the report.
- Select 'Post Roll-Up Services Worklist'.
- Select the posted Roll-Up worklist date range in the 'Through Date' field.
- Select any desired Adjustment code in the 'Default Write Off Posting Code' field.
- Click [Post Worklist].
- Verify the success message says "Post complete.".
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open 'Client Ledger' for "Client A".
- Verify that the rollup services are shown along with the component services marked as 'Roll-Up' with their respective posting code.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults - 837 Professional
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
Scenario 1: Validate 'Guarantor Program Billing Defaults', 'Sort Claims by Date of Service' = Yes.
Specific Setup:
- Guarantor:
- A new one is created or an existing guarantor is identified.
- Guarantor 1
- Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults Template:
- A Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults template is identified that includes "Guarantor 1"
- Template 1
- Client A:
- Client has unbilled, closed services in a three-month date range.
- The services should be for "Guarantor 1".
- The tester knows the date range, financial class of the guarantor, and the program.
- Some of the service dates will have one service only.
- Some of the service dates will have two services.
- Some of the service dates will have five services.
- Create Interim Billing Batch File:
- An Interim billing batch is created that covers the services of "Client A".
- Batch 1
Steps
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" from the 'Select Template' field.
- Select the '837 Professional' section.
- Set the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field to blank.
- Select 'Yes' in the 'Sort Claims by Date of Service' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Open 'Electronic Billing'.
- Create a bill for the services entering all the dates of service(s) in the billing date range by selecting "Batch 1".
- Review the dump file.
- Validate that the client has more than one CLM segment.
- Validate that the services are grouped into different claims on the bill.
- Validate that the LX segments after each CLM segment(s) are for all the services that are on the same day.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" from the 'Select Template' field.
- Select the '837 Professional' section.
- Set the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field to "2".
- Select 'Yes' in the 'Sort Claims by Date of Service' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Open 'Electronic Billing'.
- Create a bill for the services entering all the dates of service(s) in the billing date range by selecting "Batch 1".
- Review the dump file.
- Validate that the client has more than one CLM segment.
- Validate that the services are grouped into different claims on the bill.
- All services that are on the same day are grouped into one claim, unless there are more than two services.
- The system will create three claims when 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field is set to "2" and there are five services.
- The first two claims will have two LX segments. The third claim will have one LX segment.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
Scenario 2: Validate 'Guarantor Program Billing Defaults', 'Sort Claims by Date of Service' = No and None is selected.
Specific Setup:
- Guarantor:
- A new one is created or an existing guarantor is identified.
- Guarantor 1
- Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults Template:
- A Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults template is identified that includes "Guarantor 1"
- Template 1
- The 'Sort Claims by Date of Service' field in the '837 Professional' section of "Guarantor 1" has no values selected.
- Client A:
- Has unbilled, closed, services for a two or three-month(s) date range.
- The services should be for "Guarantor 1".
- The tester knows the date range, financial class of the guarantor, and the program.
- Create Interim Billing Batch File:
- An Interim billing batch is created that covers the services of "Client A".
- Batch 1
Steps
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" from the 'Select Template' field.
- Select the '837 Professional' section.
- Leave the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field blank.
- Verify that the 'Sort Claims by Date of Service' field exists and has the below options,
- Yes
- No
- Verify that for the first time when it's accessed no values are selected in the 'Verify the Sort Claims by Date of Service' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Open 'Electronic Billing'.
- Create a bill for the services entering all the dates of service(s) in the billing date range by selecting "Batch 1".
- Review the dump file.
- Validate that the client has only one CLM segment.
- Validate that the LX segments after the first CLM segment are for all the dates of services.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Guarantor/Program Billing Defaults'.
- Select 'Edit Template'.
- Select "Template 1" from the 'Select Template' field.
- Select the '837 Professional' section.
- Leave the 'Maximum Service Information Per Claim Information (Maximum LX Per CLM)' field blank.
- Select 'No' in the 'Sort Claims by Date of Service' field.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Open 'Open 'Electronic Billing'.
- Create a bill for the services entering all the dates of service(s) in the billing date range by selecting "Batch 1".
- Review the dump file.
- Validate that the client has only one CLM segment.
- Validate that the LX segments after the first CLM segment are for all the dates of services.
- Click [X].
- Click [No].
Scenario 3: File Import - GPBD Template - Add/ Edit - Validating the new field 'Sort Claims by Date of Service'.
|
Topics
• Roll-Up Services Definition
• Electronic Billing
• Compile/Edit/Post/Unpost Roll-up Services Worklist
• Guarantor / Program Billing Defaults
• 837 Professional
• File Import
• Registry Settings
• Quick Billing
|
File Import
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Quick Billing Rule Definition
Scenario 1: File Import: Quick Billing Rule Definition
Specific Setup:
- File Import:
- The 'Quick Billing Rule Definition' file type is added to the File Import.
- Create an import "File A" to add a new 'Quick Billing Rule Definition'
- Create an import "File B" to edit above 'Quick Billing Rule Definition'.
Steps
- Open the "File Import" form.
- Select the "Quick Billing Rule Definition" in the 'File Type' field.
- Select "Upload New File" in the 'Action' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select "File A".
- Select "Compile/Validate File" in the 'Action' field.
- Select "File A" in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the message = 'Compiled'
- Click [OK].
- Select "Print File" in the 'Action' field.
- Select "File A" in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the Report Viewer displays the contents of the file.
- Click [Close Report].
- Select "Post File" in the 'Action' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select "File A".
- Validate the message = 'Posted'
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open the "Quick Billing Rule Definition" form.
- Click [Edit Existing] in Add New Or Edit Existing Rule Definition.
- Select Rule Description imported above from 'Rule' dropdown list.
- Validate the fields in the form.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Follow steps 1-28,change the import file to "File B" for Edit Quick Billing Rule Definition File Import.
File Import
Note - These testing guidelines assume the user is skilled in the use of, at a minimum, the following:
- Quick Billing Rule Definition
Scenario 1: File Import: Quick Billing Group Definition
Specific Setup:
- File Import:
- The 'Quick Billing Group Definition' file type is added to the File Import.
- Create an import "File A" to add a new 'Quick Billing Group Definition'
- Create an import "File B" to edit above 'Quick Billing Group Definition'.
Steps
- Open the "File Import" form.
- Select the "Quick Billing Group Definition" in the 'File Type' field.
- Select "Upload New File" in the 'Action' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select "File A".
- Select "Compile/Validate File" in the 'Action' field.
- Select "File A" in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the message = 'Compiled'.
- Click [OK].
- Select "Print File" in the 'Action' field.
- Select "File A" in the 'Files(s)' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Validate the Report Viewer displays the contents of the file.
- Click [Close Report].
- Select "Post File" in the 'Action' field.
- Click [Process Action].
- Select "File A".
- Validate the message = 'Posted'.
- Click [OK].
- Click [Discard].
- Click [Yes].
- Open the "Quick Billing Rule Definition" form.
- Click the [Quick Billing Group Definition] item.
- Click [Edit Existing] in Add New Or Edit Existing Group Definition.
- Select Group Definition imported above from 'Quick Billing Rule Group' dropdown list.
- Validate the fields in the form.
- Click [Submit].
- Click [No].
- Follow steps 1-28,change the import file to "File B" for Edit Quick Billing Group Definition File Import.
|
Topics
• Quick Billing
• File Import
• NX
|
| |